manualshive.com logo in svg

Ronde & Schwarz 1304.0004K03, User Manual

Share
Download
Ronde & Schwarz 1304.0004K03 User Manual Download Page 26

Getting Started

R&S

®

FPL1000

26

User Manual 1178.3370.02 ─ 11

● "Duplicate": both internal and external monitor

7. Tap "Apply" to try out the settings before they are accepted permanently, then you

can easily return to the previous settings, if necessary.

8. Select "OK" if the settings are suitable.

4.1.10

 

Windows Operating System

The instrument contains the Windows operating system which has been configured
according to the instrument's features and needs. Changes in the system setup are
only required when peripherals like a keyboard or a printer are installed or if the net-
work configuration does not comply with the default settings. After the R&S

 

FPL1000 is

started, the operating system boots and the instrument firmware is started automati-
cally.

Tested software

The drivers and programs used on the instrument under Windows are adapted to the
instrument. Only install update software released by Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz to modify exist-

ing instrument software.

You can install additional software on the instrument; however, additional software can
impair instrument function. Thus, run only programs that Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz has tested

for compatibility with the instrument software.

The following program packages have been tested:

●

Symantec Endpoint Security – virus-protection software

●

FileShredder - for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk

Service packs and updates

Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows-
based operating systems. They are released through the Microsoft Update website and
associated update server. Update instruments using Windows regularly, especially
instruments that connect to a network.

Firewall settings

A firewall protects an instrument by preventing unauthorized users from gaining access
to it through a network. Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz highly recommends using the firewall on

your instrument. Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz instruments are shipped with the Windows firewall

enabled. All ports and connections for remote control are enabled.

Note that changing firewall settings requires administrator rights.

Virus protection

Take appropriate steps to protect your instruments from infection. Use strong firewall
settings and scan any removable storage device used with a Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz instru-

ment regularly. It is also recommended that you install anti-virus software on the instru-
ment. Rohde

 

&

 

Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the

Preparing for Use

Summary of Contents for 1304.0004K03

Page 1: ...R S FPL1000 Spectrum Analyzer User Manual 1178337002 Version 11 ÜQÔ2 Sie haben Fragen oder wünschen eine Beratung Angebotsanfrage unter 07121 51 50 50 oder über info datatec de Distributed by ...

Page 2: ...1323 1619 02 R S FPL1 B22 preamplifier 1323 1719 02 R S FPL1 B25 electronic attenuator 1323 1990 02 R S FPL1 B30 DC power supply 1323 1877 02 R S FPL1 B31 Li Ion battery pack and charger 1323 1725 02 R S FPL1 K9 Power sensor support 1323 1754 02 R S FPL1 K54 EMI measurements 1323 1783 02 2021 Rohde Schwarz GmbH Co KG Mühldorfstr 15 81671 München Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Email info rohde schwarz...

Page 3: ... Source Acknowledgment OSA 13 2 8 Application Notes Application Cards White Papers etc 13 2 9 Calibration Certificate 14 3 Welcome to the R S FPL1000 15 3 1 Key Features 15 4 Getting Started 16 4 1 Preparing for Use 16 4 2 Instrument Tour 30 4 3 Trying Out the Instrument 42 4 4 Operating the Instrument 60 5 Applications Measurement Channels and Result Displays 79 5 1 Available Applications 79 5 2 ...

Page 4: ...on 450 6 14 Independent CW Source Settings 461 7 Data Management 463 7 1 Restoring the Default Instrument Configuration Preset 463 7 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data 464 7 3 Import Export Functions 474 7 4 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings 477 7 5 Working with Test Reports 492 8 General Instrument Setup 508 8 1 Reference Frequency 508 ...

Page 5: ...Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters 748 10 9 Managing Settings and Results 910 10 10 Configuring the R S FPL1000 951 10 11 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 974 10 12 Using the Status Register 1007 10 13 Deprecated Commands 1019 11 Troubleshooting 1021 11 1 Error Information 1021 11 2 Error Messages in Remote Control Mode 1022 11 3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation 1023 11 4 Miscellaneous Trouble...

Page 6: ...Contents R S FPL1000 6 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 12 6 Disposal 1032 List of Commands Spectrum mode 1033 Index 1051 ...

Page 7: ...ions Products from the Rohde Schwarz group of companies are manufactured according to the highest technical standards To use the products safely follow the instructions provided here and in the product documentation Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users Use the product only for its intended use and within its performance limits Intended use and limits are described in t...

Page 8: ...ury If you mount products in a rack ensure that the rack has sufficient load capacity and stability Observe the specifications of the rack manufacturer Always install the prod ucts from the bottom shelf to the top shelf so that the rack stands securely Secure the product so that it cannot fall off the rack Connecting to power The product is an overvoltage category II product Connect the product to...

Page 9: ...g Irritation can occur if the battery fluid comes in contact with your skin or eyes Immediately and thoroughly rinse your skin or eyes with water and seek medical aid For safe handling follow these rules Do not short circuit the battery Do not mechanically damage the battery Do not open or disassemble the battery Do not expose the battery to high temperatures such as open flames hot surfaces and s...

Page 10: ... death Hot surface Do not touch Risk of skin burns Risk of fire Protective conductor terminal Connect this terminal to a grounded external conductor or to protective ground This connec tion protects you against electric shock if an electric problem occurs 1 2 Labels on R S FPL1000 Labels on the casing inform about Personal safety see Meaning of safety labels on page 10 Product and environment safe...

Page 11: ... and Regulatory Information R S FPL1000 11 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 1 3 Korea Certification Class A 이 기기는 업무용 A급 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 Korea Certification Class A ...

Page 12: ...control a complete description of the remote control com mands with programming examples and information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages Includes the contents of the getting started manual Firmware application manual Contains the description of the specific functions of a firmware application includ ing remote control commands Basic information on operating the R S FPL1000 ...

Page 13: ...tional accessories The brochure provides an overview of the instrument and deals with the specific char acteristics See www rohde schwarz com brochure datasheet FPL1000 2 7 Release Notes and Open Source Acknowledgment OSA The release notes list new features improvements and known issues of the current firmware version and describe the firmware installation The open source acknowledgment document p...

Page 14: ... User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 2 9 Calibration Certificate The document is available on https gloris rohde schwarz com calcert You need the device ID of your instrument which you can find on a label on the rear panel Calibration Certificate ...

Page 15: ...duct FPL1000 3 1 Key Features The R S FPL1000 sets standards in RF performance and usability Outstanding key features are One instrument for multiple applications Spectrum analysis Signal analysis of analog and digitally modulated signals Power measurements with power sensors Noise figure and gain measurements Solid RF performance Low spurious response Low displayed average noise level DANL 40 MHz...

Page 16: ...xternal Monitor 24 Windows Operating System 26 Logging On 27 Checking the Supplied Options 29 Performing a Self Alignment 29 Considerations for Test Setup 30 4 1 1 Lifting and Carrying The carrying handles are designed to lift or carry the instrument Do not apply exces sive external force to the handles See Lifting and carrying the product on page 7 4 1 2 Unpacking and Checking 1 Unpack the R S FP...

Page 17: ...s due to possible conducted and radi ated disturbances It is therefore not suitable for class B environments If class A equipment causes radio disturbances take appropriate measures to eliminate them 4 1 4 Setting Up the R S FPL1000 The R S FPL1000 is designed for use either on a bench top or in a rack or as a porta ble instrument with optional battery operation in a transport bag in the field See...

Page 18: ...eating and damage the product Design and implement an efficient ventilation concept for the rack To mount the R S FPL1000 in a rack 1 Use an adapter kit to prepare the R S FPL1000 for rack mounting a Order the rack adapter kit designed for the R S FPL1000 For the order num ber see the data sheet b Mount the adapter kit Follow the assembly instructions provided with the adapter kit 2 Lift the R S F...

Page 19: ... bag With the help of the optional vest holster you can carry the R S FPL1000 in its bag and keep your hands free Together with the optional battery pack see Chapter 4 1 5 3 Optional Battery Pack R S FPL1 B31 on page 21 and packed in the dedicated carrying bag the R S FPL1000 is ideally suited for operation directly in the field even in rough environments Inspect the carrying bag for wear and tear...

Page 20: ...in the data sheet For details on the connector refer to Chapter 4 2 2 1 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch on page 38 4 1 5 2 Connecting an Optional DC Power Supply R S FPL1 B30 The R S FPL1000 can also be equipped with an optional DC power supply connector R S FPL1 B30 If installed the R S FPL1000 can be operated by a DC voltage of 12 V to 24 V For details on the connector see Chapt...

Page 21: ...first time Following a long storage period it can be necessary to charge and discharge the batteries several times to reach full capacity For batteries from third parties follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer For batteries manufactured by Rohde Schwarz observe the following If inserted in the R S FPL1000 batteries are charged via the common AC or DC power supply You can also use the...

Page 22: ...osition of main power switch Off gray 0 Standby orange I Ready green I To switch on the R S FPL1000 The R S FPL1000 is off but connected to power 1 Set the switch on the power supply to position I See Chapter 4 2 2 1 AC Power Supply Connection and Main Power Switch on page 38 The LED of the Power key is orange See Chapter 4 2 1 2 Power Key on page 33 2 Press the Power key The LED changes to green ...

Page 23: ...g network folders Network environment Before connecting the product to a local area network LAN consider the following Install the latest firmware to reduce security risks For internet or remote access use secured connections if applicable Ensure that the network settings comply with the security policies of your company Contact your local system administrator or IT department before connecting yo...

Page 24: ...manual 4 1 8 Connecting a Keyboard The keyboard is detected automatically when it is connected The default input lan guage is English US However you can also connect foreign language keyboards currently the following languages are supported for the R S FPL1000 German Swiss French Russian To configure the keyboard language 1 To access the Windows operating system press the Windows key on the extern...

Page 25: ... dialog box Show only on 2 the maximum screen resolution of the monitor is used In this case you can maximize the R S FPL1000 application window and see even more details You cannot change the monitor s screen resolution via the standard Windows configuration dialog box The R S FPL1000 supports a minimum resolution of 1280x768 pixels 1 Connect the external monitor to the R S FPL1000 2 Press the Se...

Page 26: ...hwarz has tested for compatibility with the instrument software The following program packages have been tested Symantec Endpoint Security virus protection software FileShredder for reliable deletion of files on the hard disk Service packs and updates Microsoft regularly creates security updates and other patches to protect Windows based operating systems They are released through the Microsoft Up...

Page 27: ... Network and Remote Control chapter of the R S FPL1000 user manual All necessary system settings can be defined in the Start Settings menu For required settings refer to the Windows documentation and to the hardware description 4 1 11 Logging On Windows requires that users identify themselves by entering a user name and pass word in a login window By default the R S FPL1000 provides two user accou...

Page 28: ... user user AUTOLOGIN REG file in any text editor e g Notepad 3 In the line DefaultPassword 894129 replace the default password 894129 by the new password for automatic login 4 Save the changes to the file 5 In the Windows Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 6 Enter the command C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user user AUTOLOGIN REG 7 Press the ENTER key to confirm...

Page 29: ...e firmware you have to perform a self alignment to align the data to a reference source During self alignment do not connect a signal to the RF input connector Running a self alignment with a signal connected to the RF input can lead to false measurement results Performing a self alignment Before performing this functional test make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature fo...

Page 30: ...ostatic discharge ESD Electrostatic discharge is most likely to occur when you connect or disconnect a DUT NOTICE Risk of electrostatic discharge Electrostatic discharge can damage the electronic components of the product and the device under test DUT Ground yourself to prevent electrostatic discharge damage a Use a wrist strap and cord to connect yourself to ground b Use a conductive floor mat an...

Page 31: ...nnector 8 Internal generator output 50 Ω connector requires option R S FPL1 B9 4 2 1 1 Touchscreen All measurement results are displayed on the screen on the front panel Additionally the screen display provides status and setting information and allows you to switch between various measurement tasks The screen is touch sensitive offering an alter native means of user interaction for quick and easy...

Page 32: ...error messages and date time display Any user interface elements that react to a click by a mouse pointer also react to a tap on the screen and vice versa Using touchscreen gestures you can perform the fol lowing tasks among others See Chapter 4 3 Trying Out the Instrument on page 42 Changing a setting Changing the display Changing the displayed result range in a diagram Moving a marker Zooming in...

Page 33: ... a predefined state change basic settings and pro vide print and display functions A detailed description of the corresponding functions is provided in the R S FPL1000 user manual Table 4 2 System keys System key Assigned functions Preset Resets the instrument to the default state Setup Provides basic instrument configuration functions e g Reference frequency external internal Date time display co...

Page 34: ...asurement Trace Configures the graphical analysis of the measurement data Meas Provides the measurement functions Measurement of multicarrier adjacent channel power Ch Power ACLR Carrier to noise spacing C N C N0 Occupied bandwidth OBW Spectrum emission mask measurement Spectrum Emission Mask Spurious emissions Spurious Emissions Measurement of time domain power Time Domain Power Third order inter...

Page 35: ...actor Thus they have the same function as an ENTER key ESC Closes all kinds of dialog boxes if the edit mode is not active Quits the edit mode if the edit mode is active In dialog boxes that contain a Can cel button it activates that button For Edit dialog boxes the following mechanism is used If data entry has been started it retains the original value and closes the dialog box If data entry has ...

Page 36: ...h In a list scrolls forward and backward through the list entries In a table moves the selection bar vertically In windows or dialog boxes with a vertical scroll bar moves the scroll bar Arrow Left Arrow Right Keys The arrow left or arrow right keys do the following In an alphanumeric edit dialog box move the cursor In a list scroll forward and backward through the list entries In a table move the...

Page 37: ...idual elements are described in more detail in the subsequent sections 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Figure 4 3 Rear panel view 1 3 Removable rechargeable Li ion batteries 2 AC power supply connection and main power switch with fuse 4 DC power connector 5 GPIB IEC 625 interface 6 Reference clock connectors 7 Trigger input connector 8 Noise source control 9 IF Video out connector 10 Aux Po...

Page 38: ...charged both via AC or DC power supply For safety information concerning batteries see Handling batteries safely on page 9 As an alternative a DC power supply connector option R S FPL1 B30 is available DC power supplies from 12 V to 24 V and from 13 A to 6 5 A can be used Connect the connector according to the following diagram Pin Description 1 2 3 1 Plus 2 Ground 3 Not used If you use an externa...

Page 39: ...Trigger In connector to input an external trigger or gate data Thus you can control the measurement using an external signal The voltage level is 1 4 V The typical input impedance is 10 kΩ 4 2 2 6 Noise Source Control The Noise Source Control female connector is used to provide the supply voltage for an external noise source For example use it to measure the noise figure and gain of amplifiers and...

Page 40: ...UX port Pin Signal Description 1 GND Ground 2 not used for spectrum analysis 3 GND Ground 4 not used for spectrum analysis 5 GND Ground 6 not used for spectrum analysis 7 GND Ground 8 to 11 not used for spectrum analysis 12 GND Ground 13 5 V max 250 mA Supply voltage for external circuits 14 to 19 I O_ no Control lines for user ports see user manual 20 GND Ground 21 READY FOR TRIG GER Signal indic...

Page 41: ...e Chapter 6 3 2 Power Sen sors on page 278 This connector is provided by the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 4 2 2 11 USB The rear panel provides two additional female USB 3 0 standard connectors to con nect devices like a keyboard a mouse or a memory stick see also Chapter 4 2 2 11 USB on page 41 4 2 2 12 LAN The R S FPL1000 is equipped with a 1 GBit Ethernet IEEE 802 3u network interfac...

Page 42: ...the R S FPL1000 User Manual Basic instrument operation is described in Chapter 4 4 Operating the Instrument on page 60 Prerequisites The instrument is set up connected to the mains system and started up as descri bed in Chapter 4 1 Preparing for Use on page 16 For these first measurements you use the internal calibration signal so you do not need any additional signal source or instruments Try out...

Page 43: ... of the calibration signal is now displayed in the standard level versus frequency diagram Figure 4 4 Calibration signal as RF input Instrument warmup time Note that the instrument requires an initial warmup time after switching it on A mes sage in the status bar Instrument warming up indicates that the operating temper ature has not yet been reached Wait until this message is no longer displayed ...

Page 44: ...y calibration frequency of 50 MHz becomes visible Figure 4 5 Calibration signal with optimized display settings 4 3 2 Displaying a Spectrogram In addition to the standard level versus frequency spectrum display the R S FPL1000 also provides a spectrogram display of the measured data A spectro gram shows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency the y axis...

Page 45: ...n additional window instead Figure 4 6 Adding a Spectrogram to the display Drop the icon 4 Close the SmartGrid mode by tapping the Close icon at the top right corner of the toolbar 5 Close the Overview You see the spectrogram compared to the standard spectrum display Since the calibration signal does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e vertically Th...

Page 46: ...ations in parallel and then switch between the channel set ups automatically to perform the measurements sequentially We will demonstrate this feature by activating additional measurement channels for a different frequency range a zero span measurement and an I Q analysis To activate additional measurement channels 1 Press the Mode key on the front panel 2 On the New Channel Setup tab of the Mode ...

Page 47: ... for this spectrum display In the Frequency dialog box set the center frequency to 500 MHz and the span to 1 GHz Figure 4 9 Frequency spectrum of the calibration signal with a larger span 4 Repeat the previous steps to activate a third Spectrum window 5 Change the frequency range for this spectrum display Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 48: ...set the Reference Level value to 10 dBm As the calibration signal does not vary over time the level versus time diagram dis plays a straight line Figure 4 10 Time domain display of the calibration signal 7 Create a new measurement channel for I Q analysis a Press the Mode key b Tap the IQ Analyzer button to activate a measurement channel for the I Q Analyzer application c Tap the Display Config so...

Page 49: ...diagram for I Q analysis e Close the SmartGrid mode The IQ Analyzer measurement channel displays the real and imaginary signal parts in separate windows To display the MultiView tab An overview of all active measurement channels is provided in the MultiView tab This tab is always displayed if more than one measurement channel is active and can not be closed Tap the MultiView tab Trying Out the Ins...

Page 50: ...ments configured in the active channel setups can be performed sequentially that means one after the other automatically either once or continuously 1 Tap the Sequencer icon in the toolbar 2 Toggle the Sequencer softkey in the Sequencer menu to On A continuous sequence is started i e each channel setup measurement is per formed one after the other until the Sequencer is stopped Trying Out the Inst...

Page 51: ...et a marker on the peak in our first Spectrum measurement 1 In the MultiView tab double tap the Spectrum window frequency sweep with spectrogram display to return to the Spectrum measurement channel 2 Tap the spectrum display to set the focus on that window 3 Double tap the spectrum window to maximize it as we currently do not need the spectrogram display 4 Press the Run Single key on the front pa...

Page 52: ... 3370 02 11 6 Now you can move the marker by tapping and dragging it to a different position The current position is indicated by a dotted blue line Notice how the position and value change in the marker area of the diagram Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 53: ...om the evaluation bar to the lower half of the display to add a new window for the peak list 5 Close the SmartGrid mode 6 To obtain a more conclusive peak list that does not contain noise peaks for exam ple define a threshold that is higher than the noise floor a Press the Mkr key on the front panel b Tap the Marker Config softkey in the Marker menu c Tap the Search tab in the Marker dialog box d ...

Page 54: ...ltiple Zoom icon in the toolbar The icon is highlighted to indicate that multiple zoom mode is active 2 Tap the diagram near the first peak and drag your finger to the opposite corner of the zoom area A white rectangle is displayed from the point where you tapped to the current position Figure 4 15 Defining the zoom area When you remove your finger the zoom area is enlarged in a second sub win dow...

Page 55: ...results To optimize the results we will increase the number of sweep points from the default 1001 to 32001 a Press the Sweep key on the front panel b Tap the Sweep Config softkey in the Sweep menu c In the Sweep Points field enter 32001 d Close the Bandwidth dialog box e Press the Run Single key on the front panel to perform a new sweep with the increased number of sweep points Figure 4 17 Zoomed ...

Page 56: ...fine a zoom area around markers M2 M3 and M4 Figure 4 18 Multiple zoom windows 5 Tap the Multiple Zoom icon in the toolbar again and define a zoom area around marker M5 6 To increase the size of the third zoom window drag the splitter between the win dows to the left or right or up or down Trying Out the Instrument ...

Page 57: ...nstrument settings to a file 1 Tap the Save icon in the toolbar 2 Press the keyboard key on the front panel to display the online keyboard as you will have to enter text in the next step 3 In the Save dialog box tap the File Name field and enter MyMultiViewSetup using the keyboard Keep the default File Type setting Instrument with all Channel Setups to store the configuration of all channel setups...

Page 58: ...t any time using the settings file 1 Press the Preset button to restore the default instrument settings so you can check that the stored user settings are actually restored afterwards 2 Tap the Load icon in the toolbar 3 In the Load dialog box select the MyMultiViewSetup dfl file in the default directory C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer Save 4 Tap the Load button All instrument sett...

Page 59: ... Trace Data Export tab 4 Tap the Export Trace to ASCII File button 5 Enter the file name MyMultiViewResults The trace data is stored to MyMultiViewResults DAT To create a screenshot of the display 1 Tap the Print immediately icon in the toolbar A screenshot of the current display is created Note that the colors on the screen are inverted in the screenshot to improve printout results 2 In the Save ...

Page 60: ...he web browser interface in a LAN network Using the Windows Remote Desktop application in a LAN network Connecting a PC via the GPIB interface How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in the R S FPL1000 user manual Understanding the Display Information Spectrum Mode 60 Accessing the Functionality 68 Entering Data 73 Touchscreen Gestures 74 Getting Help 77 4 4 1 Understanding the...

Page 61: ...bar or chan nel bar to enlarge the display area for the measurement results Setup Display Displayed Items For details see Chapter 8 2 Display Settings on page 509 Channel Setup Bar 61 Window Title Bar 64 Marker Information 65 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer 66 Instrument and Status Information 67 Error Information 67 4 4 1 1 Channel Setup Bar Using the R S FPL1000 you can handle s...

Page 62: ... is displayed that is the trace no longer matches the displayed instrument settings This can happen for example when you change the measurement bandwidth but the displayed trace is still based on the old bandwidth As soon as a new measurement is performed or the display is updated the icon disap pears The icon indicates that an error or warning is available for that channel setup This is particula...

Page 63: ...If the bandwidth does not correspond to the value for automatic coupling a green bullet is displayed in front of the field Compatible Compatible device mode FSL FSV default default not displayed Mode Indicates which sweep mode type is used Auto FFT automatically selected FFT sweep mode Auto sweep automatically selected swept sweep mode Pwr Swp Indicates the power sweep range for power sweep measur...

Page 64: ...alized with the results of the internal generator calibra tion APX approximation the measurements are normalized with the results of the internal generator calibration however the measurement settings have been changed since cali bration If neither label is displayed no calibration has been performed yet or normalization is not active For details see Chapter 6 3 3 1 Basics on the Internal Generato...

Page 65: ...Pwr View VIEW 5 Smoothing factor Smth Smoothing factor if enabled See Smoothing on page 401 4 4 1 3 Marker Information Marker information is provided either in the diagram grid or in a separate marker table depending on the configuration Marker information in diagram grid Within the diagram grid the x axis and y axis positions of the last two markers or delta markers that were set are displayed if...

Page 66: ... function The functions are indicated with the following abbreviations FXD Fixed reference marker Phase Noise Phase noise measurement Signal Count Signal count TRK Signal tracking Noise Meas Noise measurement MDepth AM modulation depth TOI Third order intercept measurement 4 4 1 4 Frequency and Span Information in Diagram Footer The information in the diagram footer beneath the diagram depends on ...

Page 67: ...ected a keyword and an error message if available are displayed in the status bar 4 4 1 6 Error Information If errors or irregularities are detected a keyword and an error message if available are displayed in the status bar Depending on the type of message the status message is indicated in varying colors Table 4 8 Status bar information color coding Color Type Description Red Error An error occu...

Page 68: ...sks necessary to operate the instrument can be performed using this user inter face Apart from instrument specific keys all other keys that correspond to an external keyboard e g arrow keys ENTER key operate as specified by Microsoft For most tasks there are at least 2 alternative methods to perform them Using the touchscreen Using other elements provided by the front panel e g the keypad rotary k...

Page 69: ...70 Help Select 70 Help 70 Windows 71 Print immediately Prints the current display screenshot as configured See Chapter 7 4 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Set tings on page 477 Open Opens a file from the instrument Save Recall menu See Chapter 7 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data on page 464 Save Stores data on the instrument Save Recall menu S...

Page 70: ...om mode Multiple zoom areas can be defined for the same diagram See Chapter 6 12 Zoomed Displays on page 443 Zoom off Displays the diagram in its original size See Chapter 6 12 Zoomed Displays on page 443 SmartGrid Activates SmartGrid mode to configure the screen layout See Chapter 5 6 Configuring Result Displays on page 88 Sequencer Opens the Sequencer menu to perform consecutive measurements See...

Page 71: ...e dis played at once on the screen When pressed it displays the next set of softkeys Recognizing the softkey status by color Color Meaning Orange Associated dialog box is open Blue Associated function is active for toggle keys currently active state Gray Instrument function is temporarily not available due to a specific setting or missing option You can hide the softkey display e g when using remo...

Page 72: ...oard display can be switched on and off as desired using the On Screen Keyboard function key beneath the screen When you press this key the display switches between the following options Keyboard displayed at the top of the screen Keyboard displayed at the bottom of the screen No keyboard displayed You can use the TAB key on the on screen keyboard to move the focus from one field to another in dia...

Page 73: ... transparent and is not affected by the slider Particularities in Windows dialog boxes In some cases e g if you want to install a printer original Windows dialog boxes are used In these dialog boxes the rotary knob and function keys do not work Use the touchscreen instead Entering Numeric Parameters If a field requires numeric input the keypad provides only numbers 1 Enter the parameter value usin...

Page 74: ...s finger gestures on the screen The basic gestures supported by the software and most applications are described here Further actions using the same gestures may be possible Note Inappropriate tools or excessive force can damage the touchscreen For instructions on cleaning the screen see Cleaning the product on page 10 Tapping Touch the screen quickly usually on a specific element You can tap most...

Page 75: ...rs Move two fingers together on the display pinch or move two fingers apart on the dis play spread When you pinch two fingers in the display you decrease the size of the currently dis played area showing the surrounding areas previously out of view When you spread two fingers in the display you increase the size of the currently dis played area showing more details You can pinch or spread your fin...

Page 76: ...ntally in a time domain display changes the trigger offset value if available not in free run Spreading or pinching a spectrum display changes the center frequency and span horizontal or reference level and range vertical or a combination of these set tings diagonal Spreading or pinching a time domain display changes the sweep time and trigger offset horizontal or reference level position and rang...

Page 77: ...help system is context sensitive and provides information specifically for the current opera tion or setting to be performed In addition general topics provide an overview on com plete tasks or function groups as well as background information The online help can be opened at any time by selecting one of the Help icons on the toolbar or by pressing the F1 key on an external or the on screen keyboa...

Page 78: ...r Manual 1178 3370 02 11 The pointer changes its shape to a and an arrow 2 Select the screen element to change the focus A topic containing information about the selected now focused screen element is displayed Operating the Instrument ...

Page 79: ...surement settings by creating several channel setups for the same application The number of channel setups that can be configured at the same time depends on the available memory on the instrument For more information on creating channel setups see Chapter 5 3 Defining Channel Setups on page 81 Available Applications 79 R S MultiView 81 Defining Channel Setups 81 Running a Sequence of Measurements...

Page 80: ...ote command INST SEL IQ see INSTrument SELect on page 609 AM FM PM Analog Demod The Analog Demodulation application provides measurement functions for demodulat ing AM FM or PM signals This application requires the optional firmware R S FPL1 K7 to be installed For details see the Analog Demodulation Mode User Manual Remote command INST SEL ADEM see INSTrument SELect on page 609 Noise Figure The No...

Page 81: ... FPL1 K70 User Manual Remote command INST SEL DDEM see INSTrument SELect on page 609 5 2 R S MultiView Each application is displayed in a separate tab If more than one application is active an additional tab MultiView provides an overview of all currently active channel set ups at a glance In the MultiView tab each individual window contains its own chan nel setup bar Select the channel setup bar ...

Page 82: ...etween measure ments quickly and easily Defining a channel setup 82 New Channel Setup 83 Replace Current Channel Setup 83 Duplicate Current Channel 83 Closing a channel setup 83 Defining a channel setup To start a new channel setup or replace an existing one select the corresponding application in the Mode dialog box Note The channel setups are labeled with the application name If that name alread...

Page 83: ...e currently active channel setup can be duplicated i e a new channel setup of the same type and with the identical measurement settings is started The name of the new channel setup is the same as the copied channel setup extended by a consecu tive number e g Spectrum Spectrum 2 Remote command INSTrument CREate DUPLicate on page 606 Closing a channel setup To close a channel setup simply close the ...

Page 84: ...dual channel setups are updated in the tabs as the measurements are performed Sequential operation itself is independent of the cur rently displayed tab Sequencer modes Three different Sequencer modes are available Single Sequence Similar to single sweep mode each measurement is performed once until all mea surements in all defined Channel s have been performed Continuous Sequence Similar to conti...

Page 85: ...Q Analyzer For Continuous Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer For Channel defined Sequence the following sweeps will be performed 5x Spectrum 6x Spectrum 2 2 x Spectrum 3 7x IQ Analyzer 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 5x Spectrum 2 x Spectrum 3 Run Single Run Cont and Single Sweep...

Page 86: ...Tem SEQuencer on page 611 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate on page 610 INITiate SEQuencer ABORt on page 610 Sequencer Mode Defines how often which measurements are performed The currently selected mode softkey is highlighted blue During an active Sequencer process the selected mode softkey is highlighted orange Single Sequence Each measurement is performed once until all measurements in all active cha...

Page 87: ...y active channel setups are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs until the Sequencer is stopped The result displays in the individual channel setups are updated as the measure ments are performed To stop the Sequencer To stop the Sequencer temporarily press the highlighted Run Single or Run Cont key not for a channel defined sequence To continue the Sequencer press the key again...

Page 88: ...display settings that are usually configured during initial instrument setup independently of the current measurement e g which items or colors are displayed on the screen are described in Chapter 8 2 1 Display Settings on page 509 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid 88 Changing the Size of Windows 93 5 6 1 Laying out the Result Display with the SmartGrid Measurement results can be ev...

Page 89: ... The same evaluation method can be displayed in multiple windows simultaneously New windows are added by dragging an evaluation icon from the evaluation bar to the screen The position of each new window depends on where you drop the eval uation icon in relation to the existing windows All display configuration actions are only possible in SmartGrid mode When Smart Grid mode is activated the evalua...

Page 90: ...ow would be replaced the drop area is highlighted in a darker color shade Positioning the window The screen can be divided into up to four rows Each row can be split into up to four columns where each row can have a different number of columns However rows always span the entire width of the screen and may not be interrupted by a column A single row is available as the drop area for the window in ...

Page 91: ...verview Select the Display Config softkey from the Meas Config menu The SmartGrid functions and the evaluation bar are displayed To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the Close icon in the right hand corner of the toolbar or press any key 5 6 1 3 How to Add a New Result Window Each type of evaluation is displayed in a separate window Up to 16 individual windows c...

Page 92: ...ote command LAYout REMove WINDow on page 742 LAYout WINDow n REMove on page 745 5 6 1 5 How to Arrange the Result Windows 1 Select an icon from the evaluation bar or the Move icon for an existing evaluation window 2 Drag the evaluation over the SmartGrid A blue area shows where the window will be placed 3 Move the window until a suitable area is indicated in blue 4 Drop the window in the target ar...

Page 93: ... Changing the Size of Windows Each channel setup tab may contain several windows to evaluate the measurement results using different methods A splitter allows you to change the size of neighbor ing windows The splitters are not available in SmartGrid mode To change the size of two neighboring windows drag the splitter between the win dows in either direction Configuring Result Displays ...

Page 94: ...Configuration 310 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration 319 Trigger and Gate Configuration 334 Adjusting Settings Automatically 346 Marker Usage 348 Trace Configuration 390 Display and Limit Lines 424 Zoomed Displays 443 Importing and Exporting Measurement Results for Evaluation 450 Independent CW Source Settings 461 6 1 Configuration Overview Access all menus Each channel setup provides an ove...

Page 95: ...er 6 2 7 5 SEM Configuration on page 173 For Spurious measurements Spurious Setup see Chapter 6 2 8 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration on page 203 7 Optionally Outputs Requires option R S FPL1 B5 see Chapter 6 3 4 Output Settings on page 301 8 Analysis See Chapter 6 10 Trace Configuration on page 390 and Chapter 6 9 Marker Usage on page 348 9 Display See Chapter 5 6 Configuring Result ...

Page 96: ...ed at any time by press ing the MEAS CONFIG key The easiest way to configure measurements is using the configuration Overview see Chapter 6 1 Configuration Overview on page 94 In addition to the measurement specific parameters the general parameters can be configured as usual see Chapter 6 The Spectrum Application RF Measurements on page 94 Many measurement functions provide special result display...

Page 97: ...ero Span 97 Power Sweep 98 All Functions Off 98 Frequency Sweep A common frequency sweep of the input signal over a specified span Can be used for general purposes to obtain basic measurement results such as peak levels and spec trum traces The Frequency menu is displayed This is the default measurement if no other function is selected Use the general measurement settings to configure the measurem...

Page 98: ...7 Remote command SOURce si POWer MODE on page 796 All Functions Off Switches off all measurement functions and returns to a basic frequency sweep Selecting Frequency Sweep has the same effect 6 2 1 2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic sweep mea surements For remote operation see Chapter 10 6 17 Programming Example Perfo...

Page 99: ...elect one of the following RUN CONT key Continuous Sweep softkey in the Sweep menu After each sweep is completed a new one is started automatically While the mea surement is running the RUN CONT key is highlighted To stop the measure ment press the RUN CONT key again The key is no longer highlighted The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started 6 2 1 3 Measurement Examples Measuri...

Page 100: ...y span is defined the resolution band width the video bandwidth and the sweep time are automatically adjusted because these functions are defined as coupled functions in the presettings 5 Select MKR to activate marker 1 and automatically set it to the maximum of the trace The level and frequency values measured by the marker are displayed in the marker information at the top of the display Note Pe...

Page 101: ...uced by 30 dB without causing the signal path to be overloaded Reducing the reference level by 30 dB Set the reference level to 30 dBm The maximum of the trace is near the maximum of the measurement diagram The increase in the displayed noise is not substantial Thus the distance between the signal maximum and the noise display dynamic range has increased Setting the reference level with the help o...

Page 102: ...nal counter In order to obtain a correct result when measuring the frequency with the internal sig nal counter an RF sinusoidal signal or a spectral line must be available The marker must be located more than 25 dB above the noise level to ensure that the specified measurement accuracy is adhered to 6 2 1 4 Measurement Example Measuring Levels at Low S N Ratios The minimum signal level a signal an...

Page 103: ...erence level to 30 dBm The signal is measured with the auto peak detector and is completely hidden in the intrinsic noise of the R S FPL1000 Figure 6 1 Sine wave signal with low S N ratio 5 To suppress noise spikes average the trace In the Traces configuration dialog set the Trace Mode to Average see Trace Mode on page 399 The traces of consecutive sweeps are averaged To perform averaging the R S ...

Page 104: ...narrower than the resolution bandwidth Set the trace mode back to Clear Write then set the VBW to 10 kHz manually in the Bandwidth configuration dialog The RF signal can be distinguished from noise more clearly Figure 6 3 RF sine wave signal with low S N ratio with a smaller video bandwidth 7 By reducing the resolution bandwidth by a factor of 10 the noise is reduced by 10 dB Set the RBW to 100 kH...

Page 105: ...al and Spectrum Analyzer is the ability to separate the spec tral components of a mixture of signals The resolution at which the individual compo nents can be separated is determined by the resolution bandwidth Selecting a resolu tion bandwidth that is too large may make it impossible to distinguish between spectral components i e they are displayed as a single component see also Chapter 6 6 1 1 S...

Page 106: ...28 015 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 300 kHz 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 30 kHz and the video bandwidth to 1 kHz Note Larger video bandwidths The video bandwidth is set to 1 kHz in order to make the level drop in the center of the two signals clearly visible At larger video bandwidths the video voltage that results from envelope detection is not suffi ciently suppressed This produces addit...

Page 107: ...s Matching generator and R S FPL1000 frequencies The level drop is located exactly in the center of the display only if the generator frequencies match the frequency display of the R S FPL1000 exactly To achieve exact matching the frequencies of the generators and the R S FPL1000 must be synchronized 5 Set the resolution bandwidth to 100 kHz It is no longer possible to clearly distinguish the two ...

Page 108: ...on bandwidth to 1 kHz The two generator signals are shown with high resolution However the sweep time becomes longer At smaller bandwidths the noise display decreases simulta neously 10 dB decrease in noise floor for a decrease in bandwidth by a factor of 10 Figure 6 8 Measurement of two equally leveled RF sinusoidal signals with a resolution band width 1 kHz which is significantly smaller than th...

Page 109: ...routines that output the modulation depth numerically in percent directly Figure 6 9 Test setup Table 6 4 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 128 MHz Level 30 dBm Modulation 50 AM 10 kHz AF 1 Select PRESET to reset the instrument 2 Set the center frequency to 128 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 50 kHz 4 Select MEAS AM Modulation Depth to activate the modulation depth mea surement The R...

Page 110: ...0 rectifies the RF input signal that is removes the negative parts and displays it as a magnitude spectrum The rectification also demodulates AM modu lated signals The AF voltage can be displayed in zero span if the modulation side bands fall within the resolution bandwidth Displaying the AF of an AM modulated signal Zero Span Figure 6 11 Test setup Table 6 5 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW ...

Page 111: ...Volt AMPT Amplitude Config Unit V 8 Define triggering in response to the AF signal using the video trigger to produce a static image a Press the TRIG key b Select Video c Set the Trg Gate Level to 50 The trigger level is displayed as a horizontal line across the entire measurement diagram The R S FPL1000 displays the 1 kHz AF signal as a static image in zero span Figure 6 12 Measurement of the AF ...

Page 112: ...ming and duration of the TDMA burst and rise and fall times of the burst are important Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals 112 Measuring the Signal to Noise Ratio of Burst Signals 116 Measuring the Power Characteristic of Burst Signals To measure power in zero span the R S FPL1000 offers easy to use functions that measure the power over a predefined time Measuring the Power of a GS...

Page 113: ...e trigger threshold in the measurement diagram 9 Activate power measurement within the activation phase of the burst in zero span a Press the MEAS key b Select Time Domain Power c Select Time Dom Power Config d Set the Limits state to On e Select the Left Limit input field f By turning the rotary knob clockwise move the vertical line S1 to the start of the burst g Select the Right Limit input fiel...

Page 114: ... Table 6 7 Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 890 MHz Level 0 dBm Modulation GSM one timeslot activated The measurement is based on the example Measuring the Power of a GSM Burst During the Activation Phase on page 112 1 Switch off the power measurement a Press the MEAS key b Select Zero Span 2 Increase the time resolution by setting the sweep time to 100 µs SWEEP Sweep Time Manual 3 ...

Page 115: ...s The R S FPL1000 displays the rising edge of the GSM burst Figure 6 16 Rising edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time resolution 4 Move the falling edge of the burst to the center of the display To do so switch the trigger Slope to Falling TRIG Trigger Gate Config The R S FPL1000 displays the falling edge of the GSM burst Figure 6 17 Falling edge of the GSM burst displayed with high time r...

Page 116: ... 890 MHz 3 Set the frequency span to 0 Hz 4 Set the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz 5 Set the reference level to 0 dBm level of the signal generator 6 Set the sweep time to 2 ms SWEEP Sweep Time Manual The R S FPL1000 shows the GSM burst continuously across the display 7 Use the trigger source Video and the trigger slope Rising to trigger on the rising edge of the burst and shift the start of the bu...

Page 117: ...noise ratio of a GSM burst signal in zero span 10 Note down the power result for the measured noise indicated by the TD Pow RMS result in the marker table Subtract the measured noise power from the burst power to obtain the signal to noise ratio of the burst signal 6 2 2 Basic Evaluation Methods Measurement results can be displayed and evaluated using various different methods also at the same tim...

Page 118: ...tomatically if configured accordingly See Marker Table Display on page 356 Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 739 Results CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 837 CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 850 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies a...

Page 119: ...hows how the spectral density of a signal varies over time The x axis shows the frequency or sweep time the y axis shows the measurement time A third dimension the power level is indicated by different colors Thus you can see how the strength of the signal varies over time for different frequencies The spectrogram display consists of two diagrams the standard spectrum result dis play upper diagram...

Page 120: ...rnal generator output This measurement is only available if the optional internal generator is installed R S FPL1 B9 and active and only in the Spectrum application Thus you can use the internal generator signal as a reference input signal for your power converting DUT Then you can compare the DUT input to its output at the RF input of the analyzer Ideally the result is a linear trace that is the ...

Page 121: ...ent The compression point refers to the power level at which a power converting device deviates from a linear input to output relation The compression point of an amplifier defines the upper limit of its dynamic range Using an optional internal generator the R S FPL1000 can perform a power sweep to determine the compression point of a device under test In a power sweep compression point measuremen...

Page 122: ... points can be defined depending on the amount of deviation For example the 1 dB compression point indicates when the output power deviates from the linear response by 1 dB RF Input power Generator output power Ideal trace Actual trace 1 dB 1 dB compr point x dB x dB compr point Reference point Figure 6 21 Compression point calculation Level offset In an ideal measurement setup the relation betwee...

Page 123: ... start ing point is referred to as the reference point for the compression measurement 1 dB RF Input power Generator output power Linear trace Ref 1 Actual trace Ref Point 2 1 dB cp Ref 2 1 dB 1 dB cp Ref 1 Reference point 1 Linear trace Ref 2 Figure 6 22 Reference point offset However you can shift the reference point anywhere within the specified power sweep range In this case the linear trace o...

Page 124: ...n Generator Level Input level of the DUT at which the compression occurs Measured Level Output level of the DUT at which the compression occurs Remote commands FETCh CMEasurement P1DB RESult on page 625 FETCh CMEasurement P3DB RESult on page 625 FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult on page 625 6 2 3 3 Power Sweep Compression Point Settings Access Overview Select Measurement Power Sweep Compr Points Meas...

Page 125: ...lculation is based By default the reference point is automatically set to the start level of the power sweep see Level Start Level Stop on page 299 In manual mode define the reference point as required For details see Reference point on page 123 Remote command CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence MODE on page 622 CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence VALue on page 622 Compression Points Selects which compr...

Page 126: ...e internal generator 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the Power Sweep measurement function 3 Select GEN Config 4 Set the State to On 5 Define the output power range to be provided to the DUT by the generator as the Level Start and Level Stop 6 Connect your DUT to the R S FPL1000 7 Perform a new measurement The input power vs the output power of the DUT are...

Page 127: ... as to display the power of a pure sine wave signal correctly irrespective of the selected detector This calibration cannot be applied for non sinusoidal signals Assuming that the digitally modulated signal has a Gaussian amplitude distribution the signal power within the selected resolution band width can be obtained using correction factors The internal power measurement rou tines in a signal an...

Page 128: ...you must specify the channel to which the relative adjacent channel power values refer By default it is the TX channel with the maximum power Table 6 9 Measurements performed depending on the number of adjacent channels Number of adj chan Measurement results 0 Channel powers 1 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent channel 2 Channel powers Power of the upper and lower adjacent channe...

Page 129: ...z or in dBc relative to the specified reference TX channel Retrieving Results via Remote Control All or specific channel power measurement results can be retrieved using the CALC MARK FUNC POW RES command from a remote computer see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 618 Alter natively the results can be output as channel power density i e in reference to the measurement bandwidt...

Page 130: ...esponds to the reciprocal of the measured bandwidth The number of A D converter values N used to calculate the power is defined by the Sweep Time The time per trace pixel for power measurements is directly propor tional to the selected Sweep Time If the sample detector is used it is best to select the smallest Sweep Time possible for a given span and resolution bandwidth The minimum time is obtain...

Page 131: ...ssion channel spacing 2 x transmission channel bandwidth measurement margin For adjacent channel power measurements the Adjust Settings function sets the fre quency span as a function of the following parameters Number of transmission channels Transmission channel spacing Adjacent channel spacing Bandwidth of one of adjacent channels ADJ ALT1 or ALT2 whichever is furthest away from the transmissio...

Page 132: ...an also select the trace average mode Power to ensure correct power measurements see Average Mode on page 401 Note that in power measurements this setting affects the VBW regard less of whether or not a trace is actually averaged The video bandwidth for the defined channel settings can be optimized Use the Adjust Settings function in the Ch Power menu or the General Settings tab of the ACLR Setup ...

Page 133: ...er depends on the number of averages and the signal characteristics in the channel to be mea sured The Adjust Settings function switches off trace averaging You can deactivate the trace averaging manually in the Traces configuration dialog box see Average Mode on page 401 Reference Level To achieve an optimum dynamic range set the reference level so that the signal is as close to the reference lev...

Page 134: ...urement Settings General measurement settings are defined in the ACLR Setup dialog in the General Settings tab Standard 135 Predefined Standards 135 User Standards 135 Number of channels Tx Adj 136 Reference Channel 136 Selected Trace 137 Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode 137 Channel power level and density Power Unit 137 Power Mode 137 Setting a fixed reference for Channel Power measurements...

Page 135: ...mote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet on page 626 User Standards Standard Access CP ACLR Config General Settings tab Manage User Standards In addition to the predefined standards you can save your own standards with your specific measurement settings in an XML file so you can use them again later User defined standards are stored on the instrument in the C ProgramData Rohde Sc...

Page 136: ...ep points is increased to ensure that adjacent channel powers are measured with adequate accuracy For more information on how the number of channels affects the measured powers see Chapter 6 2 4 2 Channel Power Results on page 128 Remote command Number of Tx channels SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt on page 631 Number of Adjacent channels SENSe POWer ACHannel ACPairs on page 628 Reference Chan...

Page 137: ... addi tional functions Absolute and Relative Values ACLR Mode and Reference Channel to obtain the signal to noise ratio Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult PHZ on page 641 Power Mode The measured power values can be displayed directly for each trace Clear Write or only the maximum values over a series of measurements can be displayed Max Hold In the latter case the power v...

Page 138: ...620 Sweep Time With the RMS detector a longer Sweep Time increases the stability of the measure ment results For recommendations on setting this parameter see Sweep Time on page 130 The Sweep Time can be set via the softkey in the Ch Power menu and is identical to the general setting in the Sweep configuration dialog box Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 764 Channel Setup The Channel Setting...

Page 139: ...ed for any Tx channel is automatically also defined for all subsequent Tx channels Thus only enter one value if all Tx channels have the same bandwidth The value entered for any ADJ or ALT channel is automatically also defined for all alternate ALT channels Thus only enter one value if all adjacent channels have the same bandwidth Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch on page 62...

Page 140: ...same factor new spacing value old spacing value Again only enter one value for equal channel spacing For different spacing configure the spacings from top to bottom For details see How to Set Up the Channels on page 142 Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch on page 631 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel on page 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch on page 630 Limit Che...

Page 141: ...ilable Remote command Activating Deactivating SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch on page 633 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ACHannel on page 633 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe ALTernate ch on page 633 Alpha value SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa CHANnel ch on page 632 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ACHannel on page 632 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch on page 632 ...

Page 142: ...w to Set Up the Channels Channel definition is the basis for measuring power levels in certain frequency ranges Usually the power levels in one or more carrier Tx channels and possibly the adja cent channels are of interest Up to 18 carrier channels and up to 12 adjacent channels can be defined When a measurement standard is selected all settings including the channel band widths and channel spaci...

Page 143: ... the adjacent channels have the following spacing 20 kHz ADJ 40 kHz ALT1 60 kHz ALT2 80 kHz ALT3 100 kHz ALT4 Set the spacing of the first adjacent channel ADJ to 40 kHz For all other adjacent channels the spacing is multiplied by factor 2 80 kHz ALT1 120 kHz ALT2 160 kHz ALT3 Starting from the default setting set the spacing of the fifth adjacent channel ALT4 to 150 kHz For all higher adjacent ch...

Page 144: ...easurements For power measurements with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels you can define a fixed reference power and compare subsequent measurement results to the stored reference power 1 Configure a measurement with only one Tx channel and no adjacent channels see also How to Set Up the Channels on page 142 2 In the ACLR Setup dialog box select the Set CP Reference button The channel p...

Page 145: ...he R S FPL1000 2 Set the center frequency to 1950 MHz 3 Select the Channel Power ACLR measurement function from the Select Mea surement dialog box 4 Set the W CDMA 3GPP REV standard for adjacent channel power measurement in the ACLR Setup dialog box The R S FPL1000 sets the channel configuration to the W CDMA standard for mobiles with two adjacent channels above and below the transmit channel The ...

Page 146: ...se of the R S FPL1000 with the Channel Power Function Noise in any bandwidth can be measured with the channel power measurement func tions Thus the noise power in a communication channel can be determined for exam ple If the noise spectrum within the channel bandwidth is flat the noise marker can be used to determine the noise power in the channel by considering the channel band width However in t...

Page 147: ...matically set to the optimum values required for the measure ment 7 Stabilize the measurement result by increasing the Sweep Time Set the Sweep Time to 1 s The trace becomes much smoother because of the RMS detector and the channel power measurement display is much more stable Figure 6 24 Measurement of the R S FPL1000 s intrinsic noise power in a 1 23 MHz channel bandwidth 6 2 4 7 Optimizing and ...

Page 148: ...than a Channel Power measurement The TDP measure ment is a zero span measurement where the sweep time determines the measure ment time Due to the FFT measurement duplicate averaging is performed provid ing very stable results very quickly Note however that for TDP measurements channel filters are not available and a fixed RBW is used Thus the measurement may not be according to standard for some t...

Page 149: ...S detector is activated The carrier to noise measurements are only available in the frequency domain span 0 Measurement process Depending on whether the carrier is inside or outside the analyzed channel the mea surement process for the carrier to noise ratio varies The carrier is outside the analyzed channel In this case it is sufficient to switch on the desired measurement function and to set the...

Page 150: ...di cated in the diagram Remote command You can also query the determined carrier to noise ratio via the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES CN0 see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 618 6 2 5 3 Carrier to Noise Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement C N C N0 Carrier Noise Config Both a carrier to noise ratio C N and a carrier to noise ra...

Page 151: ...asure another trace use the Marker To Trace softkey in the Marker menu see Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 264 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect on page 619 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 618 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb STATe on page 620 C N0 Switches the measurement of the carrier noise ratio with reference to a 1 Hz bandwidth o...

Page 152: ... page 645 1 Press the C N C N0 softkey to configure the carrier to noise ratio measure ment 2 To change the channel bandwidth to be analyzed press the Channel Bandwidth softkey 3 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration press the Adjust Settings softkey 4 To activate the measurements without reference to the bandwidth press the C N softkey To activate the measurements with r...

Page 153: ...0 and 99 9 can be set Measurement principle The bandwidth containing 99 of the signal power is to be determined for example The algorithm first calculates the total power of all displayed points of the trace In the next step the points from the right edge of the trace are summed up until 0 5 of the total power is reached Auxiliary marker 1 is positioned at the corresponding frequency Then the poin...

Page 154: ... step instructions see How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits on page 158 Prerequisites To ensure correct power measurement especially for noise signals and to obtain the correct occupied bandwidth the following prerequisites and settings are necessary Only the signal to be measured is displayed in the window or search limits are defined to include only one carrier ...

Page 155: ...ated as a function result Occ Bw Centroid in the marker table Frequency offset The offset of the calculated centroid frequency to the defined center frequency of the R S FPL1000 is indicated as a function result Occ Bw Freq Offset in the marker table Remote command The determined occupied bandwidth can also be queried using the remote command CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW or CALC MARK FUNC POW RES AO...

Page 156: ...ght limits are consid ered The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 6 6 Measuring the Occupied Bandwidth on page 645 Power Bandwidth 156 Channel Bandwidth 157 Adjust Settings 157 Search Limits Left Right 157 Deactivating All Search Limits 157 Power Bandwidth Defines the percentage of total power in the displayed frequency range which defines the occupied ban...

Page 157: ... are optimized Frequency span 3 channel bandwidth RBW 1 40 of channel bandwidth VBW 3 RBW Detector RMS The reference level is not affected by Adjust Settings For an optimum dynamic range select the reference level such that the signal maximum is close to the reference level See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 315 The adjustment is carried out only once If necessary the...

Page 158: ...ransmission channel 6 To optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration select Adjust Set tings 7 Start a sweep The result is displayed as OBW in the marker results How to determine the OBW for a multicarrier signal using search limits 1 Press the MEAS key or select Select Measurement in the Overview 2 Select the OBW measurement function 3 Select the OBW Config softkey 4 Define the p...

Page 159: ...Set the Power Bandwidth to 99 8 Set the Channel Bandwidth to 21 kHz as specified by the PDC standard 9 Optimize the settings for the selected channel configuration by selecting Adjust Settings 10 Adjust the reference level to the measured total power by selecting Auto Level in the Auto set menu 11 The PDC standard requires the peak detector for OBW measurement In the Traces configuration dialog se...

Page 160: ...ments a Fast SEM mode is available A special limit check for SEM measurements allows for monitoring compliance of the spectrum 6 2 7 2 Typical Applications Spectrum Emission Mask measurements are typically performed to ensure that modu lated signals remain within the valid signal level ranges These ranges are defined by a particular transmission standard both in the transmission channel and neighb...

Page 161: ...see also Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 166 The following information is provided in the result summary Label Description General information Standard Loaded standard settings Tx Power Power of the reference range Tx Bandwidth Tx bandwidth used by the reference range RBW RBW used by the reference range Range results Range Low Start of the frequency range the peak value was found in Range ...

Page 162: ...ks are not only listed in the Result Summary they are also indicated by colored squares in the diagram optionally see Show Peaks in the List Evaluation settings Figure 6 26 Detected peak display in SEM measurement Furthermore you can export the results of the result summary to a file which can be exported to another application for further analysis Results for SEM with multiple sub blocks In the S...

Page 163: ...nce range can be queried using CALC MARK FUNC POW RES PPOW see CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 618 The measured power trace can be queried using TRAC DATA and TRAC DATA X see TRACe n DATA on page 823 and TRACe n DATA X on page 825 The measured peak power list can be queried using TRAC DATA LIST see TRACe n DATA on page 823 6 2 7 4 SEM Basics Some background knowledge on basic...

Page 164: ...arameter set by pressing PRESET or by loading an XML file If you want a parameter set to be avail able permanently create an XML file for this configuration for details refer to How to save a user defined SEM settings file on page 190 If you load one of the provided XML files the sweep list contains ranges and parame ters according to the selected standard Reference range The range containing the ...

Page 165: ... a minimum of one sweep point This allows you to increase the resolution within a specific range for detailed analysis You do not have to increase the overall number of sweep points and thus the measure ment time for the SEM measurement Symmetrical ranges You can easily define a sweep list with symmetrical range settings i e the ranges to the left and right of the reference range are defined symme...

Page 166: ...p List settings every time the settings change These limit lines are labeled _SEM_LINE_ xxx _ABS 0 3 and _SEM_LINE_ xxx _REL 0 3 where xxx is an index to distinguish limit lines between different channel setups The limit line defined for the currently used power class is indicated by a red line in the display The result of the limit check is indicated at the top of the diagram Note that only Pass ...

Page 167: ... A new function allows you to define limit lines whose start or end points or both are variable depending on the carrier power Thus the resulting limit line can change its slope within the range depending on the carrier power Common relative limit lines are calculated once for the defined start and end points and maintain a constant slope If the relative limit value function is used in combination...

Page 168: ...s see Sweep List on page 174 Filter Type RBW VBW Sweep Time Mode Reference Level RF Attenuation Mode RF Attenuation Preamplifier Activating Fast SEM mode Fast SEM mode is activated in the sweep list see Sweep List on page 174 or using a remote command Activating the mode for one range automatically activates it for all ranges in the sweep list Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb HSPeed on page 651 F...

Page 169: ...e Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels also referred to as a Multi SEM measurement Sub blocks are a set of multiple ranges around a defined center frequency carrier Multiple sub blocks can include gaps or overlap and each sub block defines a separate mask In the overlapping masks multi limit lines are calculated Up to 3 sub bl...

Page 170: ...default configuration with only one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency this is the familiar configuration For setups with more than one sub block frequencies are defined relative to the center frequency of the reference ranges for the individual sub blocks However in the result summary frequencies are indicated as absolute values Relative frequencies that refer to d...

Page 171: ...ollowing combinations for overlapping ranges MAX MAX maximum of the two limit lines is used MAX SUM maximum of the two limit lines is used SUM SUM sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used NONE MAX NONE SUM limit line and parameters of the NONE range are ignored NONE NONE depends on the position of the overlapping ranges in relation to the mid frequency between the two neighb...

Page 172: ...tuation overlapping ranges Range 4 None Range 5 None overlap and cross the mid frequency between sub blocks 1 and 2 Result Subranges 4a and 5a are created left and right of the mid frequency For subrange 4a limit line and parameters of range 4 apply For subrange 5a limit line and parameters of range 5 apply Global SEM limit check For the complete SEM measurement which can consist of multiple sub b...

Page 173: ...s on page 304 Only ranges within this global span are considered for the SEM measurement Multi SEM configuration In the Spectrum application application only spectrum emissions can be measured for multiple sub blocks of channels see SEM with Multiple Sub Blocks Multi SEM on page 169 Up to 3 sub blocks with 2 gaps can be defined For each sub block the familiar configuration settings concerning rang...

Page 174: ...SEM measurements the input signal is split into several frequency ranges which are swept individually and for which different limitations apply You configure the indi vidual frequency ranges and mask limits in the Sweep List If you edit the sweep list always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Ranges and Range Settings on page 164 Range Start Range Stop 175 Fast SEM 175 Filt...

Page 175: ...equency values for each range relative to the center frequency Center the ref erence range on the center frequency The current Tx Bandwidth defines the mini mum span of the reference range see Channel Power Settings on page 181 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STARt on page 654 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FREQuency STOP on page 654 Fast SEM Activates Fast SEM mode for all range...

Page 176: ...Data is Mea sured Sweep Time on page 323 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME AUTO on page 664 Sweep Time Sets the sweep time value for the range For details on the sweep time see Chapter 6 6 1 7 How Long the Data is Measured Sweep Time on page 323 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri SWEep TIME on page 663 Ref Level Sets the reference level for the range For details on the ...

Page 177: ...range Up to four limits are possible For details on limit checks see Limit Lines in SEM Measurements on page 166 The limit state affects the availability of all limit settings Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe on page 661 CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL on page 907 Abs Limit Start Stop n Sets an absolute limit value for the n th power class at the start or stop frequency of the r...

Page 178: ... li RELative STOP ABS on page 660 Multi Limit Calc n Defines the function used to calculate the limit line for the n th power class for overlap ping ranges in Multi SEM measurements For details see Limit calculation for individ ual ranges on page 171 NONE reference ranges only the limit of the reference range is used SUM Sum of the two limit lines calculated for linear powers is used MAX Maximum o...

Page 179: ...ted on the other side of the reference range Deleting ranges the symmetrical range on the other side of the reference range is also deleted Editing range settings the settings in the symmetrical range are adapted accord ingly Note If Fast SEM mode is deactivated while Symmetrical Setup mode is on Sym Setup mode is automatically also deactivated If Fast SEM mode is activated while Symmetrical Setup...

Page 180: ...ing corresponds to the global set ting in the Frequency settings see Center Frequency Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb SCENter on page 650 Standard Defines the use of a standard settings file for a particular sub block For details see Standard Files on page 183 Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb PRESet STANdard on page 648 Edit Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mas...

Page 181: ... can be configured for this method Peak Power Determines the peak power within the reference range Remote command SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 666 Channel Power Settings If the Power Reference Type Channel Power was selected additional parameters can be configured Tx Bandwidth Channel Power Settings Defines the bandwidth used for measuring the channel power with Minimum span Tx Bandwidth of re...

Page 182: ...anges For details see Power classes on page 165 Used Power Classes 182 PMin PMax 183 Sweep List 183 Adding or Removing a Power Class 183 Used Power Classes Defines which power classes are considered for the SEM measurement Limits can be defined only for used power classes It is only possible to select either one specific power class or all the defined power classes If All is selected the power cla...

Page 183: ...te command CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum on page 671 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum on page 671 Sweep List Switches to the Sweep List tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box and focuses the Limit Check setting for the corresponding power class 1 4 in the refer ence range see Limit Check n on page 177 Adding or Removing a Power Class Adds a new power ...

Page 184: ...4 File Name 184 Load Standard 185 File Explorer 185 Save Standard 185 Delete Standard 185 Restore Standard Files 185 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 912 File Name Cont...

Page 185: ...Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stan dard Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Standard Files function see Restore Standard Files on page 185 Restore Standard Files Restores the standards predefined by Rohde Schwarz a...

Page 186: ...n page 823 Show Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active SEM measurement are marked with blue squares in the Spectrum diagram Remote command CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow on page 673 Margin Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check you can define a margin or threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the result summary Only pea...

Page 187: ... also in non contiguous ranges an SEM measure ment with multiple sub blocks can be configured The following tasks are described To select an SEM measurement on page 187 To perform an SEM measurement according to a standard on page 187 To configure a user defined SEM measurement on page 187 To perform a Multi SEM measurement on page 189 For remote operation see Chapter 10 6 7 10 Example SEM Measure...

Page 188: ...Range buttons which refer to the currently selected range the reference range by default If the signal trace is symmetric to the center frequency activate the Sym Setup option to make setup easier and quicker 6 Define the measurement parameters for each range as required If symmetrical setup is activated you only have to configure the ranges to one side of the center range In particular define the...

Page 189: ...be used Select the Edit button and configure the sweep list manually as defined in To configure a user defined SEM measurement on page 187 Be sure to select the correct vertical tab for the corresponding sub block within each subtab of the Spectrum Emission Mask configuration dialog Define a function to be used for overlapping ranges in the Multi Limit Calc field of the sweep list 6 Start a sweep ...

Page 190: ... settings file 3 Select the Save button The settings are stored to a file with the extension xml as specified How to delete an SEM settings file 1 In the Standard Files tab of the Spectrum Emission Mask dialog box select the file you want to delete 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The settings file is removed from the R S FPL1000 How to restore default SEM settings files The R S FP...

Page 191: ... for the result file 6 Select the Save button The file with the specified name and the extension dat is stored in the defined storage location 6 2 7 7 Measurement Example Multi SEM Measurement The following measurement example demonstrates an SEM measurement for a signal with multiple sub blocks A programming example demonstrating a SEM measurement in a remote environment is provided in Chapter 10...

Page 192: ... define the settings for the 3GPP FDD signal Set the Center Frequency to 900 MHz Set the Base Station RF Bandwidth to 5 MHz Select Apply to SEM 8 For Sub Block B define the settings for the EUTRA LTE signal Set the Center Frequency to 906 5 MHz Set the Base Station RF Bandwidth to 5 MHz Select Apply to SEM 9 Select RUN SINGLE to perform a measurement with the new settings The results of the measur...

Page 193: ...mData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std directory of the R S FPL1000 To load a settings file use the Load function in the Standard Files tab of the Spec trum Emission Mask dialog box see How to load an SEM settings file on page 190 All XML files are stored under C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std The files for importing range settings obey the rules of the XML standard The child nodes attribu...

Page 194: ...Note also that you must define two limit nodes one that defines the limit in absolute values and one in relative values Make sure units for the Start and Stop nodes are identical for each Limit node For details refer to Sweep List on page 174 The child nodes and attributes of this element are shown in Table 6 15 The following tables show the child nodes and attributes of each element and show if a...

Page 195: ...tLimitFailMode Range Index n For contents of the Range node see Table 6 15 Define up to twenty Range nodes Range PowerClass The Range element is structured as follows Range Index n Name Name ChannelType Channel Type Channel Type WeightingFilter Type FilterType Type RollOffFactor Factor RollOffFactor Bandwith Bandwidth Bandwidth WeightingFilter FrequencyRange Start RangeStart Start Stop RangeStop S...

Page 196: ...inkDirection Name Downlink Uplink None Yes ShortName DL UL No Reference Power Yes Method TX Channel Power TX Channel Peak Power Yes Reference Channel string No Table 6 14 Attributes and child nodes of the PowerClass element Child Node Attribute Value Parameter description Mand StartPower Value power in dBm The start power must be equal to the stop power of the previ ous power class The Start Power...

Page 197: ...l ter Only if the filter type is RRC Bandwidth bandwidth in Hz Filter bandwidth Only if the filter type is RRC FrequencyRange Yes Start frequency in Hz Start value of the range Yes Stop frequency in Hz Stop value of the range Yes Limit dBm Hz dBm dBc dBr dB A Range must contain exactly two limit nodes one of the limit nodes has to have a relative unit e g dBc the other one must have an absolute un...

Page 198: ... Mode Manual Auto RF Att Mode on page 176 Yes if the Refer enceLevel child node is used Preamplifier ON OFF 1 0 Preamp on page 177 Yes ASCII File Export Format Spectrum Emission Mask When trace data from an SEM measurement is exported the data is stored in ASCII format as described below The first part of the file lists information about the signal analyzer and the general setup File contents Expl...

Page 199: ...ber of detected peaks File data section 0 12750000 2515000 30000 13242367500 43 844 722747802734 0 33028793334960938 49 6697120 66650391 FAIL Measured peak values range number start frequency stop frequency resolution bandwidth of range frequency of peak absolute power in dBm of peak relative power in dBc of peak related to the channel power distance to the limit line in dB positive value means ab...

Page 200: ...xible definition of all parameters A result table indicates the largest devia tions of the absolute power from the limit line for each range and the results can be checked against defined limits automatically 6 2 8 2 Spurious Emissions Measurement Results The measured signal including any spurious emissions and optionally the detected peaks are displayed in the Spurious Emissions measurement diagr...

Page 201: ...splay all peaks Display a certain number of peaks per range Display only peaks that exceed a threshold Margin Display detected peaks as blue squares in the diagram as well as in the peak list Furthermore you can save the evaluation list to a file Retrieving Results via Remote Control The measured spurious values of the displayed trace can be retrieved using the TRAC DATA SPUR command see TRACe n D...

Page 202: ...urement on page 688 Limit Lines in Spurious Measurements Limit lines allow you to check the measured data against specified limit values Gener ally it is possible to define limit lines for any measurement in the Spectrum application using the Lines key For Spurious measurements however a special limit line is available via the Sweep List and it is strongly recommended that you use only this limit ...

Page 203: ...re indicated in red and by an asterisk Although a margin functionality is not available for the limit check a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list can be defined Furthermore you can define how many peaks per range are listed For details see List Evaluation on page 207 6 2 8 4 Spurious Emissions Measurement Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Spur...

Page 204: ...t always follow the rules and consider the limitations described in Ranges and Range Settings on page 202 Range Start Range Stop 205 Filter Type 205 RBW 205 VBW 205 Sweep Time Mode 205 Sweep Time 205 Detector 205 Reference Level 206 RF Attenuation Mode 206 RF Attenuation 206 Preamp 206 Sweep Points 206 Stop After Sweep 206 Transducer 206 Limit Check 207 Abs Limit Start Abs Limit Stop 207 Insert be...

Page 205: ...or details on the RBW see Chapter 6 6 1 1 Separating Signals by Selecting an Appropriate Resolution Bandwidth on page 320 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth RESolution on page 678 VBW Sets the VBW value for this range For details on the VBW see Chapter 6 6 1 2 Smoothing the Trace Using the Video Bandwidth on page 320 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo on page 678 Sweep Ti...

Page 206: ... RF Attenuation Sets the attenuation value for that range Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation on page 681 Preamp Switches the preamplifier on or off For details on the preamplifier see Preamplifier on page 316 Remote command SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN STATe on page 682 Sweep Points Sets the number of sweep points for the specified range For details on sweep points see Chapter ...

Page 207: ... page 683 Insert before Range Insert after Range Inserts a new range to the left of the currently focused range before or to the right after The range numbers of the currently focused range and all higher ranges are increased accordingly The maximum number of ranges is 30 Delete Range Deletes the currently focused range The range numbers are updated accordingly Adjusting the X Axis to the Range De...

Page 208: ...Peaks If activated all peaks that have been detected during an active list evaluation are marked with blue squares in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n PEAKsearch PSHow on page 687 Margin A margin functionality is not available for the limit check However you can define a margin threshold for the peak values to be displayed in the evaluation list Only peaks that exceed the margin value are di...

Page 209: ...file selection dialog box that is dis played when you select the Save function For details see How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 210 Remote command MMEMory STORe n LIST on page 936 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 912 6 2 8 5 How to Perform a Spurious Emissions Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform spurious emis sions measurements ...

Page 210: ... the peak power levels for each range are also indicated in the diagram 9 To save the evaluation list export the results to a file as described in How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List on page 210 How to Save the Spurious Emissions Evaluation List The evaluation list from a Spurious Emissions measurement can be saved to a file which can be exported to another application for further a...

Page 211: ...nd measurement function Center Freq 13250000000 000000 Hz X axis settings Freq Offset 0 000000 Hz Span 26499982000 000000 Hz x Axis LIN Start 9000 000000 Hz Stop 8000000000 000000 Hz Level Offset 0 000000 dB Y axis settings Ref Position 100 000000 y Axis LOG Level Range 100 000000 dB Trace settings Trace Mode CLR WRITE Sweep Count 1 TRACE 1 Trace Mode CLR WRITE x Unit Hz y Unit dBm List evaluation...

Page 212: ...APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering 215 APD and CCDF Configuration 216 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement 222 Examples 223 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 226 6 2 9 1 About the Measurements The probability of amplitude values can be measured with the Amplitude Probability Distribution function APD During a selectable measurement time all occurring ampli tude values are assig...

Page 213: ...compression and thus an increase of the bit error rate at the receiver The peak power or the crest factor of a signal is therefore an important transmitter design criterion The crest factor is defined as the peak power to mean power ratio or logarithmically as the peak level minus the average level of the signal To reduce power consumption and cut costs transmitters are not designed for the larges...

Page 214: ... Function CCDF The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF shows the probability that the mean signal power amplitude will be exceeded in percent The level above the mean power is plotted along the x axis of the graph The origin of the axis corresponds to the mean power level The probability that a level will be exceeded is plotted along the y axis A red line indicates the ideal Gaussi...

Page 215: ...sired position Diagram Scaling The scaling for both the x axis and y axis of the statistics diagram can be configured In particular you can restrict the range of amplitudes to be evaluated and the probabili ties to be displayed Remote commands CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t on page 697 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res on page 698 6 2 9 4 APD and CCDF Basics Gated Triggering Statistic measurement...

Page 216: ... CCDF Configuration Configuration consists of the following settings Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value see Reference Level on page 313 Basic Settings 217 Gate Range Definition for APD and CCDF 218 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams 220 Measurements and Results ...

Page 217: ... only Defines a probability value Thus the power which is exceeded with a given probability can be determined very easily If marker 1 is deactivated it is switched on automati cally Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent on page 691 Analysis Bandwidth Defines the analysis bandwidth For correct measurement of the signal statistics the analysis bandwidth has to be wider than the signal bandwi...

Page 218: ...o capture full periods of data If the defined number of samples exceeds the limit it is automatically reduced to the maximum value Remote command CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples on page 692 Gated Trigger Activates and deactivates gating for statistics functions for the ACP and the CCDF measurements The gate ranges are defined using the Edit Gate Ranges function Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe on ...

Page 219: ...on page 692 Period Length of the period to be traced The period is the same for all traces If you change the period for one trace it is automatically changed for all traces Make sure the defined period is not longer than the total measurement time of the cur rent measurement Keep in mind that the measurement time depends on the band width and the number of samples see Number of Samples on page 218...

Page 220: ...3 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STOP gr on page 694 Scaling for Statistics Diagrams Access Overview Amplitude Scale tab Or AMPT Scale Config For statistics displays scale settings are available for both the y axis and the x axis The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 6 9 4 Scaling the Diagram on page 694 Figure 6 32 Scale settings for CCDF diagram In statistic...

Page 221: ...t X Axis Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespec tive of the selected unit The scaling of the x axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 767 Y Axis Defines the scaling settings for the probability distribution Y Unit Y Axis Defines the scaling type of ...

Page 222: ...age 695 6 2 9 6 How to Perform an APD or CCDF Measurement The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform basic statistic measurements For remote operation see Chapter 10 6 9 7 Programming Example Measuring Sta tistics on page 698 To start a basic statistic measurement 1 Press the MEAS key then select the APD or CCDF measurement 2 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of s...

Page 223: ...nge 1 Use to On d Define the start time of range 2 as duration of pulse 1 duration of interval e Define the stop time of range 2 as start time of range 2 duration of pulse 2 f Activate range 2 by setting Range 2 Use to On g Define the third range in the same way 5 Start a sweep As soon as the defined number of samples have been measured the statistical evaluation is displayed Only the signal level...

Page 224: ...ted bandwidth is too small for a digitally modulated signal the amplitude distribution at the output of the IF filter becomes a Gaussian dis tribution according to the central limit theorem and thus corresponds to a white noise signal The true amplitude distribution of the signal therefore cannot be determined A programming example demonstrating a statistics measurement in a remote environ ment is...

Page 225: ... S FPL1000 225 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 Figure 6 33 Amplitude probability distribution of white noise 4 Now select the CCDF measurement function from the Select Measurement dia log box Figure 6 34 CCDF of white noise Measurements and Results ...

Page 226: ...gate 6 2 10 Time Domain Power Measurement The Time Domain Power measurement determines the power of a signal in the time domain A time domain power measurement is only possible for zero span About the Measurement 226 Time Domain Power Results 226 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines 227 Time Domain Power Configuration 228 How to Measure Powers in the Time Domain 229 Measurem...

Page 227: ...S The measured values are updated after each sweep or aver aged over a user defined number of sweeps trace averaging The results can also be queried using the remote commands described in Chap ter 10 6 10 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 700 6 2 10 3 Time Domain Power Basics Range Definition Using Limit Lines The range of the measured signal to be evaluated for the power measurement can be ...

Page 228: ... a limited evaluation range usually a trig ger is required 6 2 10 4 Time Domain Power Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Time Domain Power Time Dom Power Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 6 10 Measuring the Time Domain Power on page 700 Results 228 Limit State 229 Left Limit Right Limit 229 Results Activates the power results to b...

Page 229: ...on page 702 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN RESult on page 704 Limit State Switches the limitation of the evaluation range on or off Default setting is off If deactivated the entire sweep time is evaluated If switched on the evaluation range is defined by the left and right limit If only one limit is set it corresponds to the left limit and the right limit is defined by the stop frequen...

Page 230: ...t lines S1 and S2 are displayed c Define the left limit limit line S1 the right limit S2 or both 5 Start a sweep The measured powers are displayed in the marker results 6 2 10 6 Measurement Example This measurement example demonstrates the time domain power calculation for a GSM burst Test setup Signal generator settings e g R S SMW Frequency 1 8 GHz Level 10 dBm Modulation GSM EDGE Procedure 1 Pr...

Page 231: ...harmonic distortion About the Measurement 231 Harmonic Distortion Basics 232 Harmonic Distortion Results 234 Harmonic Distortion Configuration 235 How to Determine the Harmonic Distortion 237 6 2 11 1 About the Measurement With this measurement it is possible to measure the harmonics easily for example from a VCO In addition the total harmonic distortion THD is calculated For measurements in the f...

Page 232: ...rious results If necessary the fundamental wave must be attenuated selectively with respect to the other harmonics with a high pass filter Harmonics are particularly critical regarding high power transmitters such as transceivers because large harmonics can interfere with other radio services Harmonic distortion can be determined as the level of the individual components or as the root mean square...

Page 233: ...et RF attenuation The formula for the internally generated level P1 at the 2nd harmonic in dBm is P1 2 PI S H I 2 The lower measurement limit for the harmonic is the noise floor of the signal analyzer The harmonic of the measured DUT should if sufficiently averaged by means of a video filter be at least 4 dB above the noise floor so that the measurement error due to the input noise is less than 1 ...

Page 234: ...nal analyzer contribute to the har monic the reduction in the harmonic level is correspondingly smaller High sensitivity harmonics measurements If harmonics have very small levels the resolution bandwidth required to measure them must be reduced considerably The sweep time is therefore also increased con siderably In this case the measurement of individual harmonics is carried out with the R S FPL...

Page 235: ...ower Remote commands The results can also be queried using remote commands The first harmonic frequency can be read out via the general center frequency com mand SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 750 THD CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics DISTortion on page 712 List of harmonics CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST on page 712 6 2 11 4 Harmonic Distortion Configuration Access Overview Se...

Page 236: ...requency This setting is identical to the normal sweep time for zero span see also Sweep Time on page 327 Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 765 Harmonic RBW Auto Enables disables the automatic adjustment of the resolution bandwidth for Normal 3dB Gaussian filter types The automatic adjustment is carried out according to RBWn RBW1 n If RBWn is not available the next higher value is used ...

Page 237: ...dialog box 2 Define the number of harmonics to be determined using the Number of Harmon ics softkey 3 Perform a sweep The trace for the determined harmonics are displayed in the diagram separated by red display lines The measured power for each harmonic in relation to the funda mental is indicated in the result table 4 If the signal changes significantly during or after the harmonics measurement u...

Page 238: ... to measure the third order intercept point TOI a two tone signal with equal carrier levels is expected at the R S FPL1000 input Marker 1 and marker 2 both nor mal markers are set to the maximum of the two signals Marker 3 and marker 4 are placed on the intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 calculates the third order intercept point from the level difference between the first 2 markers and the ...

Page 239: ...ed by mixing the 2nd harmonic of useful signal PU1 and signal PU2 fi1 2 fu1 fu2 1 fi2 2 fu2 fu1 2 Dependency on level of useful signals The level of the intermodulation products depends on the level of the useful signals If the two useful signals are increased by 1 dB the level of the intermodulation products increases by 3 dB which means that the spacing aD3 between intermodulation signals and us...

Page 240: ...intermodulation products of the third order increase three times as quickly as the useful signals The intercept point is the fictitious level where the two lines intersect It cannot be measured directly since the useful level is previously limited by the maximum two port output power Calculation method However the intercept point can be calculated from the known line slopes and the measured spacin...

Page 241: ...le to obtain the range that is required Since phase noise decreases as the carrier offset increases its influence decreases with increasing fre quency offset from the useful signals The following diagrams illustrate the intermodulation free dynamic range as a function of the selected bandwidth and of the level at the input mixer signal level set RF attenuation at different useful signal offsets Fi...

Page 242: ...ts sep arately using a small span The measurement time will be reduced in particular if the offset of the useful signals is large To find signals reliably when frequency span is small it is best to synchronize the signal sources and the R S FPL1000 6 2 12 3 TOI Results As a result of the TOI measurement the following values are displayed in the marker area of the diagram Label Description TOI Thir...

Page 243: ...er m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum on page 715 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MINimum on page 715 6 2 12 4 TOI Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement Third Order Intercept TOI Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 6 12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point on page 713 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 244 Search Signals 244 ...

Page 244: ...Intercept The precise TOI for the R S FPL1000 in relation to the input signals is provided in the data sheet For remote operation see Chapter 10 6 12 2 Programming Example Measuring the TOI on page 716 1 Apply a two tone signal with equal carrier levels to the R S FPL1000 input 2 On the R S FPL1000 press the MEAS key 3 Select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measure m...

Page 245: ...ise is reduced the trace is smoothed further and the intermodulation prod ucts can be seen clearly 5 Set the VBW to 1 kHz Measuring intermodulation using the Third Order Intercept TOI measurement function 1 Press the MEAS key and select the Third Order Intercept measurement function from the Select Measurement dialog box The R S FPL1000 activates four markers to measure the intermodulation dis tan...

Page 246: ...gnals at the input mixer When the RF attenuation is added the mixer level is reduced and the intermodulation distance is increased With an additional RF attenuation of 10 dB the levels of the intermodulation products are reduced by 20 dB The noise level is however increased by 10 dB Increase the RF attenuation to 20 dB to reduce intermodulation products The R S FPL1000 s intrinsic intermodulation ...

Page 247: ...rement is activated marker 1 is set to the peak level which is consid ered to be the carrier level Delta markers 2 and 3 are automatically set symmetrically to the carrier on the adjacent peak values of the trace The markers can be adjusted manually if necessary The R S FPL1000 calculates the power at the marker positions from the measured levels The AM modulation depth is calculated as the ratio ...

Page 248: ...M Modulation Depth Configuration Access Overview Select Measurement AM Modulation Depth AM Mod Depth Config The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 6 13 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth on page 717 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 248 Search Signals 249 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Indicates the detected characteristic values as determined by the AM Modulation Dep...

Page 249: ...e n MARKer m X on page 837 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 835 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative on page 850 Search Signals Performs a new search on the input signal and recalculates the AM Modulation Depth according to the measured values Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE on page 717 6 2 13 4 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement If the results ...

Page 250: ...nction to start a new peak search automati cally and restart the calculation of the AM Modulation Depth 6 2 14 Electromagnetic Interference EMI Measurement The electromagnetic interference EMI measurement is suitable for measurements according to commercial and military electromagnetic compatibility EMC standards The functionality of the measurement is particularly useful in research and develop m...

Page 251: ...k search used to get a rough idea about the location of peak levels that can indicate interference over the required frequency range This stage uses a detector that allows for a fast sweep time e g the peak detector During the second stage or final test the R S FPL1000 performs the actual EMC test a refined measurement with detectors designed for and required by EMC standards To keep measurement t...

Page 252: ...er Table The marker results are also displayed in the Result Summary in addition the Marker Table contains the marker results for those markers for which no final EMI test is per formed Final test results Result Summary The results of the final EMI tests at the active marker frequencies are displayed in the Result Summary The Result Summary provides the following information Label Description Type...

Page 253: ... Frequency Resolution Sweep Points and Scaling 257 Controlling V Networks LISN 258 Using Transducer Factors 259 Initial Measurement Peak Search 259 Final Measurement at the Marker Position 261 Limit Checks 261 Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types EMI testing requires resolution filters with a 6 dB bandwidth The EMI measurement adds the following bandwidths which comply to commercial and military ...

Page 254: ... the following detectors cannot be used as trace detectors for other traces in the same display Negative peak Auto peak Sample If you select a CISPR detector for a trace any traces using incompatible detectors are automatically set to Auto detector which uses the positive peak detector If you manually set a trace to use an incompatible detector any traces currently using a CISPR detector are autom...

Page 255: ...requency to be averaged RMS detector The RMS detector displays the root mean square RMS value over the specified dwell time The integration time is the specified dwell time The RMS detector is already available with the base unit The same considerations apply to the dwell time as for the average detector Sample detector The sample detector displays the last value from the samples allocated to a pi...

Page 256: ...ctor is only available for the CISPR filter The CISPR Average detector is applied to measure pulsed sinusoidal signals with a low pulse frequency for example It is calibrated with the RMS value of an unmodula ted sinusoidal signal The average value is determined by lowpass filters of the 2nd order simulating a mechanical pointer instrument The filter bandwidth and time lag of the detector depend o...

Page 257: ...ured frequency The time lag of the simu lated pointer instrument reflects the weighting factor of the signal depending on its form modulation etc Table 6 18 Required parameters depending on frequency for RMS Average detector Band A Band B Band C D Band E Frequency range 150 kHz 150 kHz to 30 MHz 30 MHz to 1 GHz 1 GHz IF bandwidth 200 Hz 9 kHz 120 kHz 1 MHz Time lag of simula ted pointer instru men...

Page 258: ...s bar Increase Sweep Points Example Linear axis With a linear axis the distance between the sweep points is equal e g 200 kHz Logarithmic axis With a logarithmic axis the distance between sweep points is variable In the spectrum from 10 Hz to 100 Hz the distance is a few Hz Between 100 MHz and 1 GHz the dis tance is several MHz The R S FPL1000 supports a maximum of 200001 sweep points for EMI meas...

Page 259: ... R S FPL1000 to measure interferences or wanted signals The transducer converts the measured value such as field strength current or RFI volt age into a voltage across 50 Ω During the measurement the transducer is considered a part of the instrument A transducer usually has a frequency dependent transducer factor that includes the frequency response of the corresponding device During level measure...

Page 260: ...matic peak search is off you can set the markers to any frequency you need more information about manually You can change the marker position with the rotary knob or the cursor s or position it to a particular frequency with the number s Setting markers is the same as setting markers in other spectrum measurements For more information see Chapter 6 9 Marker Usage on page 348 Searching for peaks ov...

Page 261: ...for the initial peak search The results of the final measurement are shown in the Result Summary see Chap ter 6 2 14 2 EMI Measurement Results on page 251 Defining a dwell time for the final measurement EMC tests often require a specific dwell time for an EMI measurement The dwell time defines how long the R S FPL1000 measures the signal at the frequencies of the marker positions The dwell time is...

Page 262: ...mon settings are also relevant for EMI measurements Chapter 8 7 2 Transducer Settings on page 533 Reference Level on page 313 Chapter 6 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions on page 431 EMI Marker Configuration 262 EMI Final Measurement Configuration 265 LISN Control Settings 269 EMI Marker Configuration Access MKR Marker Config The initial peak search for the EMI measurement is defined by the ...

Page 263: ...r 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defi...

Page 264: ...arker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 836 Final Test Detector Defines the detector to be used for the final EMI test at the marker frequency This setting is only available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement op...

Page 265: ...the corner frequency Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 720 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 720 Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog b...

Page 266: ...268 Res BW CISPR 269 Res BW MIL 269 Filter Type Defines the filter type The following filter types are available Normal 3dB Channel CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FPL1 K54 option MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R S FPL1 K54 option For more information see Chapter 6 6 1 6 Which Data May Pass Filter Types on page 323 Note The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measure ment option...

Page 267: ...ents using the quasipeak detector the 1 MHz RBW filter is not available see Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 253 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 758 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO on page 759 Automatic Peak Search If activated a peak search is performed automatically for all active markers after each sweep If Auto peak search and limit lines are active the active ma...

Page 268: ...cy and the Average detector for pulse repeti tion frequencies below the corner frequency Lowpass filters of the second order determine the average value simulation of a mechanical pointer instrument The RMS Average detector is only available for the CISPR filter Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector on page 720 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector o...

Page 269: ...he measurement bandwidth for military EMC standards For more information see Resolution Bandwidth and Filter Types on page 253 Remote command Filter type SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE on page 759 Filter bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 758 LISN Control Settings Access MEAS CONFIG LISN Config For measurements with power lines the following settings are available for the R S FPL1000 to...

Page 270: ...e ENV 216 network only Remote command INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe on page 722 6 2 14 5 EMI Result Analysis The EMI measurement provides functionality to analyze the results Marker demodulation The R S FPL1000 is able to demodulate AM and FM signals for acoustic tests and monitoring purposes When the demodulator function is active the EMI measurement demodulates the sig nal continuously regard...

Page 271: ...s You can create multiple templates for different applica tions Test reports are described in Chapter 7 5 Working with Test Reports on page 492 6 2 14 6 How to Perform EMI Measurements The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an EMI measure ment with the R S FPL1000 For remote operation see Chapter 10 6 14 8 Programming Example EMI Measure ment on page 725 1 Select MODE o...

Page 272: ... used for the Final Test that is the subsequent EMI measurement at the marker position d If you already know which frequencies cause irregular values set the markers to those positions Otherwise perform an initial peak search to obtain an over view see step 8 12 Optionally select the Marker Demod Config to configure continuous marker demodulation Demodulation begins immediately with the next measu...

Page 273: ...e 16 Select RUN SINGLE to start a new EMI measurement If activated a peak search is performed For each active marker a final measure ment is performed using the specified detector for the specified dwell time If acti vated the signal is demodulated at the active marker positions The specified traces to be checked are compared with the active limit lines The status of the limit check for the final ...

Page 274: ... bandwidth EMI measure ments usually require a filter with a 6 dB bandwidth 6 Define the dwell time for which each marker position is measured during the final measurement 7 To obtain an overview of exceptional values in the input signal during the initial measurement activate the Auto Peak Search 8 Select the measurement bandwidth a Select the Res BW CISPR A CISPR 6 dB filter is configured b Set ...

Page 275: ...isplayed in the over view Stored in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder of the instru ment File extension LIN Compatible to the current EMI measurement settings c In the overview click the Check Traces setting for the EN55011A limit line d Select trace 1 to be included in the limit check Trace 2 which is defined as the average is always lower than trace 1 which contains peak value...

Page 276: ... or RBW Dwell time Consider the following when defining the dwell time Unknown signals select a dwell time of at least 1 second to ensure that pulses down to a frequency of 5 Hz are weighted correctly Pulsed signals or signals that fluctuate slowly the dwell time must cover at least the time until the first signal peak is measured can require long dwell time Unmodulated signals or signals with a h...

Page 277: ...s the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input conn...

Page 278: ... S FPL1014 and R S FPL1026 Therefore switching the YIG preselec tor on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Note For the following measurements the YIG Preselector is off by default if available I Q Analyzer VSA Remote command INPut ip FILTer YIG STATe on page 779 SAW filter The R S FPL1000 hardware contains both a wide and a narrow IF path Depending on the used analysis bandw...

Page 279: ...r sensor Signal analyzer Figure 6 41 Power sensor support standard test setup Using the power sensor with several applications The power sensor cannot be used from the R S FPL1000 firmware and the R S Power Viewer Plus virtual power meter for displaying results of the R S NRP power sensors simultaneously Result display The results of the power sensor measurements are displayed in the marker table ...

Page 280: ...ches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer p STATe on page 788 Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously durin...

Page 281: ...EVice PMETer p DEFine on page 782 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 782 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p COUNt on page 782 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to How to Zero the Power Sensor on page 284 Remote command CALibration PMETer p ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 783 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency ...

Page 282: ...ting Remote command SENSe PMETer p MTIMe on page 787 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 787 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 784 Referenc...

Page 283: ...CYCle STATe on page 785 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue on page 785 6 3 2 3 How to Work With a Power Sensor The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to set up a power sensor For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 6 3 2 2 Power Sensor Set tings on page 279 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 8 5 2 Working with Power Senso...

Page 284: ... To set the currently measured power as a reference value press the Meas Ref button b Alternatively enter a value manually in the Reference Value field c Optionally select the Use Ref Level Offset option to take the reference level offset set for the analyzer into account for the measured power 10 If necessary repeat steps 3 10 for another power sensor 11 Set the Power Sensor State at the top of t...

Page 285: ...ed signal is sent to the GEN Output 50 Ω connector You can connect your DUT to the output connector thus allow ing the analyzer to control the input signal for the device directly Figure 6 42 Test setup using the internal generator You can enable or disable and configure the generator individually for each application Different usages are provided for various measurement scenarios Independent CW s...

Page 286: ...or the R S FPL1000 also allows you to set a frequency offset for frequency converting measurements Using the internal generator as a tracking generator is only available in the Spectrum application for frequency sweeps If you switch to another application a currently active tracking generator is disabled Power sweep For a power sweep measurement the internal generator signal remains at a fixed fre...

Page 287: ...ve and only in the Spectrum application Thus you can use the internal generator signal as a reference input signal for your power converting DUT Then you can compare the DUT input to its output at the RF input of the analyzer Ideally the result is a linear trace that is the output is directly proportional to the input power Any distortion to the linear trace indicates the effects of the DUT This r...

Page 288: ...to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by enabling the use of the internal generator as a tracking generator The analyzer sends a predefined list of frequencies to the internal generator The frequency list for the calibration sweep contains 201 values by default divided in equidistant frequencies between the analyz er s start and sto...

Page 289: ... new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace Approximate normalization is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR Approximate normalization occurs if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration settings Coupling RBW VBW SWT...

Page 290: ... subsequent measure ment which includes this component For an example see How to Remove the Effects of a Particular Component from Measurement Results Using Calibration on page 300 Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor is 0 dB for the ...

Page 291: ...rmation and Errors Channel bar If internal generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description CWSource source power Internal generator in operation as independent CW source with specified level Trk Gen source power Internal generator active signal sent with source power level NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and mea...

Page 292: ...ng can be avoided as follows Reducing the output level of the internal generator Level on page 293 Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 6 3 3 2 Internal Generator Settings Access Toolbar Generator Config Or Freq Generator Config The internal generator signal is only available if the optional Internal Generator R S FPL1 B9 is installed The preview in the dialog box v...

Page 293: ...pplication Remote command SOURce si FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 792 SOURce si POWer MODE on page 796 State Enables or disables the internal generator The generator signal is output at the GEN Output 50 Ω connector on the front panel Remote command OUTPut up STATe on page 790 Level Defines the output power of the internal generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is from 60 dBm to...

Page 294: ...ternal Generator R S FPL1 B9 is installed The preview in the dialog box visualizes the configured signal from the internal tracking generator For details see Chapter 6 3 3 1 Basics on the Internal Generator on page 285 Usage 295 State 295 Level 295 Level Offset 295 CW Frequency 295 Frequency Offset 295 Calibrate Transmission 296 Calibrate Reflection Short 296 Calibrate Reflection Open 296 Normaliz...

Page 295: ...r The default output power is 20 dBm The range is from 60 dBm to 10 dBm Remote command SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude on page 791 Level Offset Defines an offset to the output power of the internal generator Used to adapt the level display for example to cable loss Remote command SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 791 CW Frequency Defines the frequency of the independent CW s...

Page 296: ... out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 794 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 793 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Normalization state Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function...

Page 297: ...ngs that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 794 Save as Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with...

Page 298: ...nal provided by the internal generator Independent CW source on page 285 constant frequency and power level Tracking generator on page 286 constant power level frequency follows ana lyzer frequency only available for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application Power sweep on page 286 constant frequency linearly increasing power level only available in the Spectrum application Remote command SOURc...

Page 299: ...y OFFSet on page 792 Level Start Level Stop Defines the start and stop levels of the output power of the internal generator The power increases linearly within this range Only ascending values are allowed that is the level start value must be lower than the level stop value The range is from 60 dBm to 10 dBm If a Level Offset is defined the Level Start Level Stop values are indicated with the offs...

Page 300: ...king Generator 4 Set the State to On 5 Define the generator output level as the Level 6 Optionally to define a constant level offset for the tracking generator define a Level Offset 7 Select the Source Calibration type Transmission to perform a calibration sweep and store a reference trace for the measurement setup Normalization is automatically set to On 8 Optionally shift the reference line furt...

Page 301: ...tenuation as described in How to Calibrate a Measurement Setup Using a Tracking Generator on page 300 1 Insert the additional component in the calibrated measurement setup and perform a new measurement 2 Select the GEN Config tool on the toolbar 3 With active normalization set the Calibration Reference Value to the same value as the gain or attenuation the inserted component causes 4 Optionally sh...

Page 302: ...able for frequency sweeps or I Q measure ments The video output is a signal of 1 V It can be used for example to control demodulated audio frequencies Remote command OUTPut up IF SOURce on page 799 OUTPut up IF IFFRequency on page 799 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 801 SYSTem SPEaker STATe on page 801 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE on page 801 Noise Source Control The R S FPL1000 provides a connector NOISE SO...

Page 303: ...of the required configuration Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range 303 Stepping Through the Frequency Range Center Frequency Stepsize 303 6 4 1 1 Defining the Scope of the Measurement Frequency Range The frequency range defines the scope of the signal and spectrum to be analyzed It can either be defined as a span around a center frequency or as a range from a start to a stop frequ...

Page 304: ...ion to the selected span or resolution bandwidth for zero span measurements In some cases however it may be useful to set the step size to other values For example to analyze signal harmonics you can define the step size to be equal to the center frequency In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center fre quency of another harmonic Similarly you can define the step size to be equal ...

Page 305: ...ast Span 307 Center Frequency Stepsize 307 Frequency Offset 307 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span 0 spanmin 2 fcenter fmax spanmin 2 zero span 0 Hz fcenter fmax fmax and spanmin depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer ...

Page 306: ...etector is active the trace detector is auto matically switched to auto detector see also Restrictions for the R S FPL1000 using CISPR detectors on page 254 The sweep mode is automatically switched to FFT mode By default the frequency axis has linear scaling Logarithmic scaling of the frequency axis however is common for measurements over large frequency ranges as it enhan ces the resolution of th...

Page 307: ... percentage of the span RBW Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field Marker This setting is only available if a marker is active Sets the step size to the value of the current mark...

Page 308: ... using signal tracking In this case the signal trace is surveyed in a specified bandwidth around the expected center frequency After each sweep the center frequency is set to the maximum signal found within the searched bandwidth If no maximum signal above a defined threshold value is found in the searched bandwidth the center frequency remains unchanged The search bandwidth and the threshold valu...

Page 309: ...be configured via the Frequency dialog box Signal tracking is configured in the Signal Tracking tab of this dialog box 1 To display the Frequency dialog box do one of the following Select Frequency from the Overview Select the FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Select the SPAN key and then the Frequency Config softkey 2 Define the frequency range using one of the following methods Defi...

Page 310: ...ngs 310 Amplitude Settings 313 Scaling the Y Axis 316 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display 318 6 5 1 Impact of the Vertical Axis Settings Some background knowledge on the impact of the described settings is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration Reference Level 310 RF Attenuation 312 Scaling 312 6 5 1 1 Reference Level The reference level value is the maximum value...

Page 311: ...l results are shifted by this value and the scal ing of the y axis is changed accordingly To determine the required offset consider the external attenuation or gain applied to the input signal For attenuation define a positive offset so the R S FPL1000 increa ses the displayed power values If an external gain is applied define a negative offset so the R S FPL1000 decreases the displayed power valu...

Page 312: ...endent of the RF attenu ation Depending on the type of measurement you must find a compromise between a low noise floor and high intermodulation levels and protecting the instrument from high input levels You achieve this best by letting the R S FPL1000 determine the optimum level automatically see Attenuation Mode Value on page 315 6 5 1 3 Scaling In a linear display the measurement values are di...

Page 313: ...page 765 Reference Level 313 Shifting the Display Offset 314 Unit 314 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 315 Attenuation Mode Value 315 Impedance 315 Preamplifier 316 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum input signal level Signal levels above this value are possibly not measured correctly which is indicated by the IF Overload status display OVLD for analog baseband or dig...

Page 314: ... in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is important to keep in mind the actual power level the R S FPL1000 must handle Do not rely on the dis played reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset For details see Reference level offset on page 3...

Page 315: ...urement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 348 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 756 Attenuation Mode Value The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode Automatic attenuation ensures that no overload occurs at the RF Input connector for the current reference level It is the default setting ...

Page 316: ...ernal preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activa ted for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low output power Note If an optional external preamplifier is activated the internal preamplifier is auto matically disabled and vice versa The input signal is amplified by 20 dB if the preamplifier option is activated Remote command INPut i...

Page 317: ...upper limit of the diagram Values from 120 to 600 are available Larger values are useful for small scales such as a power range of 10 dB or 20 dB and low signal levels for example 60 dB below the reference level In this case large reference level position values allow you to see the trace again For spectrograms this value defines the position of the reference level value within the span covered by...

Page 318: ...ling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SPACing on page 770 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 769 6 5 4 How to Optimize the Amplitude Display This section gives you some advice on how to optimize the display of the ...

Page 319: ...th depend on the selected filter type In addition these settings have an impact on other measurement parame ters The following equation shows the interdependency of these settings TMIN K Span RBW2 where K Filter constant By default a Gaussian filter is used The resolution bandwidth the video bandwidth and the Sweep Time are set automatically according to the set span and default cou pling is used ...

Page 320: ...increases the displayed noise by approx 5 dB 4 77 dB precisely If the bandwidth is increased by a factor of 10 the displayed noise increases by a factor of 10 i e 10 dB If there are large level differences between signals the resolution is determined by selectivity as well as by the resolution bandwidth that has been selected The measure of selectivity used for signal analyzers is the ratio of the...

Page 321: ...on bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted Coupling is recommended if a minimum Sweep Time is required for a selected reso lution bandwidth Narrow video bandwidths require longer Sweep Time s due to the longer settling time Wide bandwidths reduce the signal noise ratio Table 6 20 Overview of RBW VBW ratios and recommendations for use Ratio RBW VBW Recommendation for use ...

Page 322: ...equired to cover the entire span The subspan which is cov ered by one FFT analysis depends on the RBW The subspan cannot be defined directly but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements Narrow subspans provide a higher dynamic range and also allow you to perform mea surements near a carrier with a reduced reference level With a wide subspan the car rier and the useful signal are l...

Page 323: ...ed with digital filters Normal 3dB Gaussian filters are set by default Some communication standards require different filters For a list of available filter types see Chapter 6 6 3 Reference List of Available RRC and Channel Filters on page 333 Normal 3 dB Gaussian filters Gaussian filters provide a good compromise between steep edges and a short settling time This filter is suitable for most meas...

Page 324: ...by the Sweep Count Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the Sweep Average Count also determines the number of averaging or maximum search proce dures see Analyzing Several Traces Trace Mode on page 395 For details on how the n...

Page 325: ...ne these settings are described in Chap ter 10 8 2 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings on page 758 How to perform a basic sweep measurement is described in Chapter 6 2 1 2 How to Perform a Basic Sweep Measurement on page 98 Figure 6 43 Bandwidth dialog box for RF measurements Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration ...

Page 326: ...pan RBW 328 RBW VBW 328 Filter Type 328 Default Coupling 329 Sweep Average Count 329 Sweep Points 329 Optimization 330 Sweep Type 330 FFT Subspans 330 Single Sweep Run Single 331 Continuous Sweep Run Cont 331 Continue Single Sweep 331 Spectrogram Frames 332 Select Frame 332 Continue Frame 332 Frame Count 332 Clear Spectrogram 332 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration ...

Page 327: ...idth If the resolution bandwidth is changed the video bandwidth is automatically adjusted Manual For manual mode define the bandwidth value The available video bandwidths are specified in the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth If the video bandwidth is defined manually a green bullet is displayed next to the VBW display in the channel bar Remote command SE...

Page 328: ...h RESolution RATio on page 759 RBW VBW Sets the coupling ratio between the resolution bandwidth and the video bandwidth This setting is only effective if VBW is set to auto mode For more information see Chapter 6 6 1 3 Coupling VBW and RBW on page 321 Sine 1 1 Video Bandwidth Resolution Bandwidth This is the default setting for the coupling ratio RBW VBW and is rec ommended if sinusoidal signals a...

Page 329: ...width VIDeo AUTO on page 760 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO on page 765 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of ...

Page 330: ...Auto to optimize the sweep rate Auto Uses a medium sized subspan to obtain a compromise between a large dynamic range and a fast sweep rate Zero span mode For zero span measurements the optimization mode defines the selection of the A D converter prefilter Table 6 22 Optimization parameters in zero span mode Optimization mode Description Dynamic The narrowest filter possible depending on the RBW i...

Page 331: ...m CONTinuous on page 813 Continuous Sweep Run Cont After triggering starts the measurement and repeats it continuously until stopped While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer I...

Page 332: ...Continue Frame Spectrogram Frames Determines whether the results of the previous sweeps are included in the analysis of the next sweeps for trace modes Max Hold Min Hold and Average This function is available in single sweep mode only On When the average or peak values are determined for the new sweep the results of the previous sweeps in the spectrogram are also taken into account Off The average...

Page 333: ...andwidth Filter Type Application 100 Hz CFILter 200 Hz CFILter 300 Hz CFILter 500 Hz CFILter 1 kHz CFILter 1 5 kHz CFILter 2 kHz CFILter 2 4 kHz CFILter SSB 2 7 kHz CFILter 3 kHz CFILter 3 4 kHz CFILter 4 kHz CFILter DAB Satellite 4 5 kHz CFILter 5 kHz CFILter 6 kHz CFILter 8 5 kHz CFILter ETS300 113 12 5 kHz channels 9 kHz CFILter AM Radio 10 kHz CFILter 12 5 kHz CFILter CDMAone 14 kHz CFILter ET...

Page 334: ...ents in your signals Gating allows you to restrict measurement analysis to the important part or parts of the signal for example bursts Triggering 334 Gating 343 6 7 1 Triggering 6 7 1 1 Triggered Measurements In a basic measurement with default settings the sweep is started immediately How ever sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a s...

Page 335: ...es in the signal analysis process before or after the input mixer after the video filter etc A signal from an external device via one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the instrument For details on the available trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 339 Trigger Offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger...

Page 336: ...level T T T Trigger hysteresis T Trigger on rising edge Trigger on falling edge Figure 6 45 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 341 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occasional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out ...

Page 337: ...ast for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Drop Out T T T Figure 6 47 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop o...

Page 338: ...Preview 338 Frequency 339 RBW 339 Sweep Time 339 Trigger Source 339 Free Run 339 External Trigger 1 340 Video 340 IF Power 340 Time 340 Trigger Level 341 Repetition Interval 341 Drop Out Time 341 Trigger Offset 341 Hysteresis 341 Trigger Holdoff 342 Slope 342 Preview The preview mode allows you to try out trigger and gate settings before actually apply ing them to the current measurement The previ...

Page 339: ...rounded to the nearest possible bandwidth Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 758 Sweep Time Preview Defines the sweep time Allowed values depend on the ratio of span to RBW and RBW to VBW For details refer to the data sheet Numeric input is always rounded to the nearest possible sweep time Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 764 Trigger Source Selects the trigger source If a tri...

Page 340: ...IGger SEQuence SOURce on page 774 IF Power Trigger Source The R S FPL1000 starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger threshold depends on the defined trigger level as well as on the RF attenuation and preamplifi cation A reference level offset if defined is also ...

Page 341: ... TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 775 Drop Out Time Defines the time that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again For more information on the drop out time see Trigger Drop Out Time on page 336 Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 772 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep For more information s...

Page 342: ...EQuence SLOPe on page 774 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 777 6 7 1 3 How to Determine the Required Trigger Gate Parameters 1 In the Trigger And Gate dialog box switch on Show Preview A zero span measurement for the currently defined center frequency is displayed 2 Set the Frequency RBW and Sweep Time such that the relevant part of the signal is displayed for example a complete burst 3 Determin...

Page 343: ...l start 3 Define whether the signal must cross the trigger level on a falling or on a rising edge Slope to trigger the measurement 4 To start the measurement with a time delay define a Trigger Offset 5 To reject triggers due to noise or jittering in the signal define a Hysteresis that is larger than the expected noise or jittering After the previous trigger the signal must exceed this threshold be...

Page 344: ...urce is exceeded and stops when the defined Gate Length is reached Additionally a delay time can be defined so that the first few measurement points after the gate opening are ignored To indicate that a gate is used for the sweep GAT and the gate source is displayed in the channel bar 6 7 2 2 Gate Settings Access Overview Trigger Trigger Gate Config Gate Settings Gate settings define one or more e...

Page 345: ...on page 343 Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth on page 777 6 7 2 3 How to Configure a Gated Measurement A gated measurement records data only while the gate conditions are fulfilled These step by step instructions demonstrate how to configure a gated measurement man ually To configure a common gated measurement 1 Determine the required parameters as described in Chapter 6 7 1 3 How to Deter m...

Page 346: ...matically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R S FPL1000 should behave default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The t...

Page 347: ...tracking generator is active see Tracking Generator Settings on page 294 This function is not available during signal tracking see Chapter 6 4 3 Keeping the Center Frequency Stable Signal Tracking on page 308 To set the optimal reference level see Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 315 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 756 Setting the Reference Level Automatic...

Page 348: ...rs and the preamplifier are also adjusted To avoid frequent adapta tion due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measure ment before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 755 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference l...

Page 349: ...Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions 358 Marker Measurement Functions 366 How to Work With Markers 387 Measurement Example Measuring Harmonics Using Marker Functions 388 6 9 1 Basics on Markers Some background knowledge on marker settings and functions is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration settings Markers are used to mark points on traces to read ou...

Page 350: ...In addition to basic markers sophisticated marker functions are provided for special results such as noise or band power measurements Marker Types 350 Activating Markers 350 Marker Results 351 6 9 1 1 Marker Types All markers can be used either as normal markers or delta markers A normal marker indicates the absolute signal value at the defined position in the diagram A delta marker indicates the ...

Page 351: ... first and last trace point respectively For details see X Value of the Sweep Point on page 393 Signal count markers determine the frequency of a signal at the marker position very accurately The results can be displayed directly within the diagram area or in a separate table By default the first two active markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are activated the results are dis...

Page 352: ...Y value Y value of the marker Function Activated marker or measurement function Function Result Result of the active marker or measurement function 6 9 2 Marker Settings Or MKR Marker Config The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 10 8 8 1 Setting Up Individual Markers on page 831 Individual Marker Setup 352 General Marker Settings 355 6 9 2 1 Individual Mar...

Page 353: ... in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 836 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 834 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram For normal markers the absolute position is indicated For delta markers the position relative to the reference marker is provided Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 837 CALCulate n DELTamarker ...

Page 354: ...t of active markers If the x axis value of the initial marker is changed the linked marker follows to the same posi tion on the x axis Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer...

Page 355: ...n MARKer m STATe on page 836 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 834 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF on page 835 6 9 2 2 General Marker Settings Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers Marker Usage ...

Page 356: ...separate area beneath the diagram Off No separate marker table is displayed If Marker Info is active the marker information is displayed within the diagram area Auto Default If more than two markers are active the marker table is dis played automatically If Marker Info is active the marker information for up to two markers is displayed in the diagram area Remote command DISPlay WINDow n MTABle on ...

Page 357: ...lts a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Note that this function may not be available in all result displays For State On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are displayed marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed reference marker is set to the position of m...

Page 358: ...be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings For more information on searching for signal peaks see Chapter 6 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 383 The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 10 8 8 4 Positioning the Marker on page 843 Marker Search Settings 358 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms 361 Positioning Functions 364 6 9 3 1 M...

Page 359: ...her side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command Chapter 10 8 8 4 Positioning the Marker on page 843 Exclude LO If activated restricts the frequency range for the marker search functions On The minimum frequency included in the peak search range is 5 resolution bandwidth RBW Due to the interference by the first local oscillator ...

Page 360: ...e peak is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO on page 843 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO on page 845 Search Limits The search results can be restricted by limiting the search area or adding search con ditions Search Limits Left Right Search Limits If activated limit lines are defined and displayed for the search Only results within the limited search range are con...

Page 361: ...lysis Markers Search or MKR TO Search Config Spectrograms show not only the current sweep results but also the sweep history Thus when searching for peaks you must define the search settings within a single time frame x direction and within several time frames y direction These settings are only available for spectrogram displays Search Mode for Next Peak in X Direction 362 Search Mode for Next Pe...

Page 362: ...frames Down Determines the next maximum minimum below the current peak in older frames Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 853 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe on page 858 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 853 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow on page 858 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum N...

Page 363: ... jumping to the LO signal at 0 Hz this frequency is excluded from the peak search Off No restriction to the search range The frequency 0 Hz is included in the marker search functions Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude on page 839 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it is identi fied as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions ...

Page 364: ...ak search If enabled only peaks that exceed the threshold are detected Remote command CALCulate n THReshold STATe on page 842 CALCulate n THReshold on page 842 Use Zoom Limits Search Limits If activated the peak search is restricted to the active zoom area defined for a single zoom Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe on page 841 Deactivating All Search Limits Search Limits Dea...

Page 365: ...arch Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated For spectrogram displays define which frame the minimum is to be searched in Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 846 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 848 Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of...

Page 366: ...lysis Marker Functions The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 10 8 8 Working with Markers on page 831 Precise Frequency Signal Count Marker 367 Measuring Noise Density Noise Meas Marker 368 Phase Noise Measurement Marker 371 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker 374 Fixed Reference Marker 376 Measuring the Power in a Channel Band Power Marker...

Page 367: ...weep time settings To determine the frequency of a signal point accurately without changing the sweep settings the R S FPL1000 is equipped with a signal counter The signal counter sets the RF to the current marker position then counts the zero crossings of the IF thus the term signal counter and derives the precise frequency value Signal counting can be performed explicitly at the current marker p...

Page 368: ...sing the noise measurement marker function the noise power density is measured at the position of the marker In the time domain mode all points of the trace are used to determine the noise power density When measurements are performed in the fre quency domain eight points to the right and left of the marker if available are used for the measurement to obtain a stable result Result display Noise de...

Page 369: ...r already indicates the power for each point of the trace Sample detector As a result of video filter averaging and trace averaging 1 05 dB is added to the marker level This is the difference between the average value and the RMS value of white noise With a logarithmic level axis 1 45 dB is added addi tionally Logarithmic averaging is thus fully taken into account which yields a value that is 1 45...

Page 370: ...ult on page 866 Marker State 370 Marker Type 370 Noise Measurement State 371 Switching All Noise Measurement Off 371 Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 836 CALCulate n DELTamarker m STATe on page 834 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta Th...

Page 371: ... Measurement Off Deactivates noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe on page 867 6 9 4 3 Phase Noise Measurement Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Phase Noise Phase Noise Config Or MKR Select Marker Function Phase Noise Phase Noise Config For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated Phase noise is unintentiona...

Page 372: ...l between the refer ence point and the noise power density It is indicated as the function result of the phase noise marker in the marker table The sample detector is automatically used and the video bandwidth set to 0 1 times the resolution bandwidth RBW The two settings are taken into account in the correction values used for the noise power measurement To obtain stable results two pixels on the...

Page 373: ... 870 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 869 Phase Noise Measurement State 373 Defining Reference Point 374 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 374 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement for the reference point in the dia gram This function is only available for delta markers Marker Usage ...

Page 374: ...oise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 869 6 9 4 4 Measuring Characteristic Bandwidths n dB Down Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions n dB down n dB Down Config Or MKR Select Marker Function n dB down n dB Down Config When characterizing the shape of a signal the bandwidth at a spe...

Page 375: ... n dB down ndB down Bw PWid Determined bandwidth or pulse width zero span at the offset Q factor Center frequency n dB down bandwidth Quality factor of the determined bandwidth characteristic of damping or resonance T1 T2 Current position and level of the temporary markers If the required position for the temporary markers cannot be determined uniquely for example due to noise dashes are displayed...

Page 376: ...Ker m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 877 6 9 4 5 Fixed Reference Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Reference Fixed Or MKR Select Marker Function Reference Fixed Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Once positioned the reference marker does not move during subsequ...

Page 377: ...r Config or MKR Select Marker Function Band Power To determine the noise power in a transmission channel you can use a noise marker and multiply the result with the channel bandwidth However the results are only accu rate for flat noise Band power markers allow you to measure the integrated power for a defined span band around a marker similar to ACP measurements By default 5 of the current span i...

Page 378: ...in a band if the reference marker is a band power marker itself If the reference marker for the band power marker is also a delta marker the absolute power level for the reference marker is used for calculation Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spectrum application For the I Q Analyzer application band power markers are only available fo...

Page 379: ...FUNCtion BPOWer STATe on page 872 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult on page 871 Band Power Measurement State 379 Span 380 Power Mode 380 Switching All Band Power Measurements Off 380 Band Power Measurement State Activates or deactivates band power measurement for the marker in the diagram Band power markers are only available for standard frequency measurements not zero span in the Spect...

Page 380: ...ute power in the band around the delta marker and the absolute power for the reference marker see Reference Marker on page 263 The powers are sub tracted logarithmically so the result is a dB value Relative band power Delta2 in dB absolute band power Delta2 in dBm absolute band power of reference marker in dBm For details see Relative band power markers on page 378 Density The result is a power le...

Page 381: ...W Alterna tively demodulation can be activated continuously i e audio output occurs regardless of the marker position and the marker stop time For measurements in the time domain zero span demodulation is always continuous Optionally a minimum level Squelch Level can be defined so that the signal is only demodulated when it exceeds the set level This is useful during continuous demodula tion to av...

Page 382: ...inuous on page 880 Marker Stop Time Defines how long the sweep is stopped at the marker position to output the demodula ted signal For zero span measurements demodulation is always active continuously regardless of the marker stop time Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff on page 880 Modulation Defines the demodulation mode for output The default setting is AM Remote c...

Page 383: ...sweep Auto Peak Search Peak search limits The peak search can be restricted to a search area The search area is defined by limit lines which are also indicated in the diagram In addition a minimum value threshold can be defined as a further search condition When is a peak a peak Peak excursion During a peak search for example when a marker peak table is displayed noise val ues may be detected as a...

Page 384: ...o eliminate the smaller peaks M3 M4 and M5 in the example above a peak excursion of at least 60 dB is required In this case the amplitude must rise at least 60 dB before falling again before a peak is detected Marker peak list The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum It is updated automatically after each sweep How many peaks are displayed can be defined ...

Page 385: ...ursion 386 Display Marker Numbers 386 Export Peak List 386 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y Value values are given Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 865 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list ...

Page 386: ...lt display type For more information see Chapter 6 9 4 8 Marker Peak List on page 383 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 839 Display Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remo...

Page 387: ...ak or Next Min key c If necessary change the search settings by selecting the Search Config soft key 3 Center the display around the determined signal point by setting the marker value to the center frequency Select the Center Mkr Freq softkey 4 Determine the precise frequency of the signal point a Select the Select Marker Function softkey b Select the Signal Count button c Select the Signal Count...

Page 388: ...creen How to Assign a Fixed Reference Marker to Delta Markers 1 In the Marker dialog box select the horizontal Markers tab 2 For the active delta marker that is to refer to the fixed reference marker select FXD from the Reference Marker list The delta marker indicates the offset of the current trace value at the marker posi tion from the fixed reference value 6 9 6 Measurement Example Measuring Ha...

Page 389: ...gnal frequency in the Frequency configuration dialog box select Center Frequency Stepsize Marker The step size for the center frequency is now equal to the marker frequency 8 Move the center frequency to the 2nd harmonic of the signal by pressing the UP key The center frequency is set to the 2nd harmonic 9 Select Auto Level to ensure the R S FPL1000 measures the harmonics with a high sensitivity 1...

Page 390: ... values measured at the sweep points The number of samples taken during a sweep can be much larger than the number of sweep points that are displayed in the measurement trace Example Assume the following measurement parameters Sample rate 32 MSamples s sweep points 1000 sweep time 100 ms Span 5 GHz During a single sweep 3 2 106 samples are collected and distributed to 1000 sweep points i e 3200 sa...

Page 391: ...s to measure the power of the different signal classes are not required Average Av Calculates the linear average of all samples contained in a sweep point To this effect R S FPL1000 uses the linear voltage after envelope detection The sampled linear values are summed up and the sum is divided by the num ber of samples linear average value For logarithmic display the logarithm is formed from the av...

Page 392: ...L1000 using CISPR detectors on page 254 The result obtained from the selected detector for a sweep point is displayed as the value at this frequency point in the trace video signal s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1 video signal s1 s2 s3 s4 s5 s6 s8 s1 Measurement point n Video Signal Meas point n 1 MAX PEAK AUTO PEAK MIN PEAK SAMPLE RMS AVG You can define the trace detector to be used for the individual tra...

Page 393: ...sweep point two different methods are available Start stop Bin centered Start stop This is the default legacy method for trace values in the frequency domain The x value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span The x value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full mea surement span All other sweep points are divided evenly betwe...

Page 394: ...cate the same results as the first and last trace point Example Assume the following measurement parameters Start frequency 1 000 GHz Stop frequency 6 000 GHz Span 5 GHz sweep points 1000 bin 5 MHz span sweep points The first trace point is displayed at fstart bin 2 1 0025 GHz The last trace point is displayed at fstop bin 2 5 9975 GHz A marker placed at 1 000 GHz indicates the same result as a ma...

Page 395: ...the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R S FPL1000 ...

Page 396: ... signal noise is effectively reduced without need for restarting the averaging process after a change of the signal In Single sweep mode the current trace is averaged with the previously stored averaged trace No averaging is carried out for the first sweep but the measured value is stored in the trace memory The next time a sweep is per formed the trace average is calculated according to the follo...

Page 397: ...oise or pseudo noise signals the positive peak amplitudes are decreased in loga rithmic averaging due to the characteristic involved The negative peak values are increased relative to the average value If the distorted amplitude distribution is aver aged a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value The difference is 2 5 dB This low average value is usually corrected in noise p...

Page 398: ... results based on the original trace You can turn trace smoothing on and off for all traces individually and compare for example the raw and the smooth trace Linear smoothing is based on the following algorithm 2 1 2 1 1 n s x n s x x y n s y Equation 6 1 Linear trace smoothing With s sample number x sample offset from s n aperture size 6 10 1 2 Trace Settings Access Overview Analysis Traces Or TR...

Page 399: ...5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted For details see Chapter 6 10 1 3 How to Configure a Standard Trace on page 403 Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe 1 6 commands DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t STATe on page 808 Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces For details see Analyzing Several Trace...

Page 400: ...mmand DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE on page 806 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 390 Note For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only not for the final test The detector for the final test is configured in the EMI marker settings see EMI Marker Confi...

Page 401: ...ects of smoothing on post processing functions Note that in Spectrum mode all functions performed after the sweep such as limit checks markers or channel power measurements are based on the smoothed trace data Thus the results will dif fer from results based on the original trace For more information see Trace Smoothing on page 397 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STAT...

Page 402: ...if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging Max Hold or Min Hold operations are performed This value is identical to the Sweep Average Count setting in the Sweep settings Remote command SENSe AVERage n COUNt on page 809 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by se...

Page 403: ... 1 3 How to Configure a Standard Trace Step by step instructions on configuring the trace settings are provided here For details on individual functions and settings see Chapter 6 10 1 2 Trace Settings on page 398 The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in Chap ter 10 8 7 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data on page 805 Trace settings are configured in ...

Page 404: ...e trace to which the settings are to be applied The settings from the source trace are applied to the destination trace The newly configured trace if not set to Blank is displayed after the next sweep 6 10 2 Spectrograms 6 10 2 1 Working with Spectrograms In addition to the standard level versus frequency or level versus time traces the R S FPL1000 also provides a spectrogram display of the measur...

Page 405: ...al does not change over time the color of the frequency levels does not change over time i e ver tically The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the col ors represent Result display The spectrogram result can consist of the following elements 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 Figure 6 55 Screen layout of the spectrogram result display 1 Spectrum result display 2 Spectrogram result disp...

Page 406: ... selected detector See Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 390 Frames are sorted in chronological order beginning with the most recently recorded frame at the top of the diagram frame number 0 With the next sweep the previous frame is moved further down in the diagram until the maximum number of captured frames is reached The display is updated continuously during the m...

Page 407: ...to create the second frame As you can see increasing the sweep count increases the accuracy of the individual traces while increasing the frame count increases the number of traces in the diagram Especially for Average or Min Hold and Max Hold trace modes the number of sweeps that are analyzed to create a single trace has an effect on the accuracy of the results Thus you can also define whether th...

Page 408: ...an activate up to 16 markers or delta markers at the same time Each marker can be assigned to a different frame Therefore in addition to the frequency you also define the frame number when activating a new marker If no frame number is specified the marker is positioned on the currently selected frame All markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame Special search functions are provid...

Page 409: ...um diagram always displays the spectrum for the currently selected frame By default the most recently recorded frame frame 0 is selected and added at the front of the diagram Rotating the spectrogram in three dimensions Depending on which aspect of the spectrogram is currently of interest you can rotate the display to have a closer look at the frequency the time or the power dimension Simply drag ...

Page 410: ...tion on all axes Sometimes a marker can be hidden by other frames If necessary rotate the spectro gram or select a different frame as the current frame Color Maps Spectrograms assign power levels to different colors to visualize them The legend above the spectrogram display describes the power levels the colors represent The color display is highly configurable to adapt the spectrograms to your ne...

Page 411: ... Focus of the Color Curve The color mapping function assigns a specified color to a specified power level in the spectrogram display By default colors on the color map are distributed evenly How ever to visualize a certain area of the value range in greater detail than the rest you can set the focus of the color mapping to that area Changing the focus is performed by changing the shape of the colo...

Page 412: ... covered by red yellow and a few shades of green Figure 6 57 Spectrogram with default linear color curve shape 0 The sample spectrogram is dominated by blue and green colors After shifting the color curve to the left negative value more colors cover the range from 100 dBm to 60 dBm blue green and yellow This range occurs more often in the example The range from 60 dBm to 20 dBm on the other hand i...

Page 413: ...n page 416 Settings concerning the frames and how they are handled during a sweep are provided as additional sweep settings for spectrogram display See Chapter 6 6 Bandwidth Filter and Sweep Configuration on page 319 Search functions for spectrogram markers are described in Chapter 6 9 3 2 Marker Search Settings for Spectrograms on page 361 General Spectrogram Settings 413 Color Map Settings 416 G...

Page 414: ... and deactivates a Spectrogram subwindow On Displays the Spectrogram as a subwindow in the original result dis play Off Closes the Spectrogram subwindow Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram LAYout on page 815 3D Spectrogram State Activates and deactivates a 3 dimensional spectrogram As opposed to the common 2 dimensional spectrogram the power is not only indicated by a color mapping but also in ...

Page 415: ...in the memory and replaces them with the new data Remote command CALCulate n SPECtrogram HDEPth on page 814 3 D Display Depth Defines the number of frames displayed in a 3 dimensional spectrogram For details see Three Dimensional Spectrograms on page 408 Time Stamp Activates and deactivates the timestamp The timestamp shows the system time while the measurement is running In single sweep mode or i...

Page 416: ...ncer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel setup However the sweep mode only takes effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel setup and only for a channel defined sequence In this case the Sequencer sweeps a channel setup in single sweep mode only once Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer ...

Page 417: ...stop sliders define the range of the color map or amplitudes for the spectrogram 6 Color curve slider adjusts the focus of the color curve 7 Histogram shows the distribution of measured values 8 Scale of the horizontal axis value range Start Stop 417 Shape 417 Hot Cold Radar Grayscale 418 Auto 418 Set to Default 418 Close 418 Start Stop Defines the lower and upper boundaries of the value range of ...

Page 418: ... described here To display a spectrogram on page 418 To remove the spectrogram display on page 419 To set a marker in the spectrogram on page 419 To configure a spectrogram on page 419 To select a color scheme on page 420 To set the value range graphically using the color range sliders on page 420 To set the value range of the color map numerically on page 421 To set the color curve shape graphica...

Page 419: ... 2 for the second to last frame Note that the frame number is always 0 or a negative value The marker is only visible in the spectrum diagram if it is defined for the currently selected frame In the spectrogram result display all markers are visible that are positioned on a visible frame To configure a spectrogram 1 Configure the spectrogram frames a Select the SWEEP key b Select the Sweep Config ...

Page 420: ...e distribution of the measured values is displayed as a histogram in the Color Map ping dialog box To cover the entire measurement value range make sure the first and last bar of the histogram are included To ignore noise in a spectrogram for example exclude the lower power levels from the histogram The value range of the color map must cover at least 10 of the value range on the horizontal axis o...

Page 421: ...djusting the reference level and level range Since the color map is configured using percentages of the total value range changing the reference level and level range of the measurement and thus the power value range also affects the color mapping in the spectrogram Editing the shape of the color curve The color curve is a tool to shift the focus of the color distribution on the color map By defau...

Page 422: ...e curve A negative value 1 to 0 focuses the lower values 0 defines a linear distribution A positive value 0 to 1 focuses the higher values 6 10 3 Trace Math Access TRACE Trace Math If you have several traces with different modes for example an average trace and a maximum trace it may be of interest to compare the results of both traces In this example you could analyze the maximum difference betwe...

Page 423: ...s trace 4 from trace 1 T1 T5 T1 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 T1 T6 T1 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 To switch off the trace math use the Trace Math Off button Remote command CALCulate n MATH t EXPRession DEFine on page 820 CALCulate n MATH t STATe on page 821 Trace Math Off Deactivates any previously selected trace math functions Remote command CALC MATH STAT OFF see CALCulate n MATH t STATe on...

Page 424: ...es are subtracted in dBm Otherwise i e with linear scaling the behav ior is the same as with linear subtraction Power Activates linear power subtraction The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to subtrac tion After the subtraction the data is converted back into its original unit Unlike the linear mode the subtraction is always done in W Remote command CALCulate n MATH t MODE on ...

Page 425: ...ines across the entire width of a diagram and can be shifted up and down Four vertical lines Vertical Line 1 to Vertical Line 4 These lines are continuous vertical lines across the entire height of the diagram and can be shifted left and right Lables Each line is identified by one of the following abbreviations in the diagrams H1 Horizontal Line 1 H2 Horizontal Line 2 V1 Vertical Line 1 V2 Vertica...

Page 426: ... vertical line a Select Vertical Line 1 2 3 or 4 b Enter the x value at which the line is to be displayed 4 To define a horizontal line a Select Horizontal Line 1 or 2 b Enter the y value at which the line is to be displayed 6 11 2 Limit Lines Limit lines allow you to check automatically whether the measured points are below or above specified values Basics on Limit Lines 426 Limit Line Settings a...

Page 427: ...ing applies The x unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting The y unit of the limit line has to be identical to the current setting with the excep tion of dB based units all dB based units are compatible with each other Validity Only limit lines that fulfill the following conditions can be activated Each limit line must consist of a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data po...

Page 428: ...e to the limit line To check the signal for maximum levels you must define an upper limit whereas to check the signal for minimum levels you must define a lower limit Limits can be defined relative to the reference level the beginning of the time scale or the center frequency or as absolute values Relative scaling is suitable for example if masks for bursts are to be defined in zero span or if mas...

Page 429: ...an existing limit line which has been shifted horizontally or vertically Defining a shift width for the values or position of the individual data points changes the line configuration thus changing the position of the line in the dia gram Limit Check Results A limit check is automatically performed as soon as any of the limit lines is activated Visibility setting Only the specified Traces to be Ch...

Page 430: ...The Spectrum Application RF Measurements R S FPL1000 430 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 Figure 6 61 Margin violation for limit check Figure 6 62 Limit violation for limit check Display and Limit Lines ...

Page 431: ... line values After recalling measurement settings the limit line values applied to the measurement may be different to those displayed in the Limit Lines dialog box see Saving and recalling transducer and limit line settings on page 465 6 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions Access Overview Analysis Lines or LINES Line Config Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R S FPL10...

Page 432: ...or the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see Limit Line Details on page 434 For more basic information on limit lines see Chapter 6 11 2 1 Basics on Limit Lines on page 426 Name 432 Unit 433 Compatibility 433 Visibility 433 Traces to be Checked 433 Comment 433 Included Lines in Overview View Filter 433 Show Lines for all Modes 433 X Offset 433 Y Offset 434 Create New...

Page 433: ... Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk on page 906 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show Com patible Only compatible lines Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated ...

Page 434: ...d CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer OFFSet on page 899 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet on page 902 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COPY on page 905 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LI...

Page 435: ...port 437 File Explorer 438 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windows conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li NAME on page 900 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li COMMent on page 895 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold ...

Page 436: ... the diagram is used as the refer ence Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MODE on page 898 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MODE on page 902 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DOMain on page 895 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing on page 897 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level uni...

Page 437: ...oint vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 434 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SHIFt on page 899 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer SHIFt on page 903 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Import Opens a file selection dialog box and loads the limit line from the s...

Page 438: ...It is strongly recommended that you define limits only via the Sweep List dialog for these measurements not using the Lines key Any changes to the special limit lines are automatically overwritten when the sweep list settings are changed The following tasks are described here How to find compatible limit lines on page 438 How to activate and deactivate a limit check on page 439 How to edit existin...

Page 439: ...isting limit lines Existing limit line configurations can be edited 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the Edit button 3 Edit the line configuration as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 440 4 Save the new configuration by selecting the Save button If the limit line is active the edited limit line is displayed in the diagram How to copy an existing l...

Page 440: ...point d Repeat this to insert all other data points To insert a data point before an existing one select the data point and then Insert Value To insert a new data point at the end of the list move the focus to the line after the last entry and then select Insert Value To delete a data point select the entry and then Delete Value 6 Check the current line configuration in the preview area of the dia...

Page 441: ...e diagram How to export a limit line Limit line configurations can be stored to an ASCII file for evaluation in other programs or to be imported later for other measurements 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the limit line 2 Select the New or Edit button 3 Define the limit line as described in How to configure a new limit line on page 440 4 Select Export to save the configuration to a file Yo...

Page 442: ...it line on page 441 This reference describes in detail the format of the export import files for limit lines Note that the bold data is mandatory all other data is optional Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal separator to be used see Deci mal Separator on page 453 Table 6 29 ASCII file format for l...

Page 443: ...e resolution of the displayed trace points tempora rily You must explicitly activate the graphical zoom function see Chapter 6 12 2 Zoom Functions on page 445 Graphical zoom and the number of sweep points Note that graphical zooming is merely a visual tool it does not change any measure ment settings such as the number of sweep points You should increase the number of sweep points before zooming a...

Page 444: ...444 Zoom Functions 445 How to Zoom Into a Diagram 447 6 12 1 Single Zoom Versus Multiple Zoom Two different graphical zoom modes are available single zoom and multiple zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible In multiple zoom mode you can enlarge up ...

Page 445: ...ccess Zoom icons in toolbar Single Zoom 445 Multi Zoom 446 Measurement Zoom 446 Level Lock 446 X Lock 447 Y Lock 447 Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram 447 Restore Original Display 447 Single Zoom A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote co...

Page 446: ... gestures see Operating Basics in the R S FPL1000 Getting Started manual Note The measurement settings are adapted to practical values based on a suitable grid for the current settings rather than to unwieldy values that reflect precisely the pixel you happen to tap If the measurement zoom leads to undesirable results you can easily return to the original measurement settings using the UNDO functi...

Page 447: ...y zoomed displays Measurement zooms for which measurement settings were adapted are recalculated based on the adapted measurement settings In this case the zoomed display is maintained Remote command Single zoom DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM STATe on page 803 Multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM MULTiple zn STATe on page 805 for each multiple zoom window 6 12 3 How to Zoom Into a Di...

Page 448: ...er Scrolling in the zoomed display You can scroll the diagram area to display the entire diagram using the scrollbars at the right and at the bottom of the diagram To return to original display Click on the Zoom Off icon in the toolbar The original trace display is restored Zoom mode remains active however To zoom into multiple positions in the diagram 1 Click on the Multi Zoom icon in the toolbar...

Page 449: ...m area tap inside the corresponding frame in the overview window and drag the frame to the new position The contents of the zoom windows are adapted accordingly To maintain a zoomed display permanently Graphical zooming only changes the resolution of the displayed trace points tempora rily In order to change the display permanently you must change the corresponding measurement settings Note Perfor...

Page 450: ...g data types can be exported depending on the application Trace data Table results such as result summaries marker peak lists etc I Q data The following data types can be imported depending on the application I Q data I Q data can only be imported and exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications See the corresponding user manuals for those applic...

Page 451: ...in one file If the import file contains more than one trace you can import several traces at once overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported Alternatively you can import a single trace only which is displayed for the trace num ber specified in Import to Trace Thi...

Page 452: ...various evaluation methods for the results of the per formed measurements However you may want to evaluate the data with other exter nal applications In this case you can export the measurement data to a standard ASCII format file DAT or CSV You can also import existing trace data from a file for example as a reference trace Spectrum application only The standard data management functions e g savi...

Page 453: ...rt HEADer on page 936 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace to be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export import files Evaluation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on...

Page 454: ... perform this function the entire histo gram buffer with all frames is exported to a file The data for a particular frame begins with information about the frame number and the time that frame was recorded For large history buffers the export operation can take some time For details on the file format in the Spectrum application see Chapter 6 13 6 Refer ence ASCII File Export Format on page 457 Re...

Page 455: ... file contains more than one trace you can import several traces at once overwriting the existing trace data for any active trace in the result display with the same trace number Data from the import file for currently not active traces is not imported Alternatively you can import a single trace only which is displayed for the trace num ber specified in Import to Trace This list contains all curre...

Page 456: ...ut The file is stored with a DAT extension For details on the storage format see Chap ter 6 13 6 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 457 For the results of a Spectrum Emission Mask SEM or Spurious Emissions measure ment special file export functions are available see How to Save SEM Result Files on page 190 SEM and Save Evaluation List on page 209 Spurious To export trace data and table res...

Page 457: ...les for result data For details see Chapter 6 13 4 How to Export Trace Data and Numerical Results on page 456 For a description of the file formats for spectrum emission mask SEM measurement settings and results see Chapter 6 2 7 8 Reference SEM File Descriptions on page 193 The file format for Spurious Emissions measurement results is described in Chap ter 6 2 8 6 Reference ASCII Export File Form...

Page 458: ...1 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics mea surements Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz ...

Page 459: ...e y1 y2 y2 being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Trace 2 Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Name of next window Data section for individual trace Trace 1 First trace Table 6 31 ASCII file format for spectrogram trace export File cont...

Page 460: ... trace CLR WRITE AVER AGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Selected detector Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Data section Trace 1 Selected trace x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Values 1001 Number of measurement points Frames 2 Numbe...

Page 461: ...plication Power sweep on page 286 constant frequency linearly increasing power level only available in the Spectrum application Remote command SOURce si FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 792 SOURce si POWer MODE on page 796 State Enables or disables the internal generator The generator signal is output at the GEN Output 50 Ω connector on the front panel Remote command OUTPut up STATe on page 790 Le...

Page 462: ...r Manual 1178 3370 02 11 If the internal generator is used as a tracking generator the frequency is coupled to the frequency of the analyzer Thus this setting is not available Remote command SOURce si INTernal FREQuency on page 791 Independent CW Source Settings ...

Page 463: ...iguration Pre set When delivered the R S FPL1000 has a default configuration You can restore this defined initial state at any time as a known starting point for measurements This is often recommendable as a first step in troubleshooting when unusual measurement results arise Factory default configuration The factory default configuration is selected such that the RF input is always protected agai...

Page 464: ...t settings applied during measurement In these cases you can store and recall instrument and measurement settings and possibly other related measurement data Two different methods are available for managing instrument settings Quick Save Quick Recall a defined set of instrument settings or channel setups are stored or recalled quickly in just one step Configurable Save Recall a user defined set of...

Page 465: ...calling the save set you must force the application to reload the limit file To do so simply open the Edit Limit Line dialog box see Chapter 6 11 2 2 Limit Line Settings and Functions on page 431 and toggle the Y Axis unit Due to that change the limit line file is auto matically reloaded and the changed limit values are applied to the current measure ment Now a new save set with the updated limit ...

Page 466: ...milar and closely related QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 466 Rename 467 Write Protection 467 Storage Type Save only 467 Recall 467 QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 Selects one of the save sets to store the current settings in or to be recalled At the time of storage the QuickSave 1 QuickSave 10 placeholder is replaced by a label indicating the storage date and time and the storage type Right click on one of the...

Page 467: ... Only the instrument settings for the currently selected measurement Channel s are stored Recall Restores the instrument settings as saved in the selected settings file If the settings file contains settings for a specific Channel only a new channel setup with the stored settings is activated otherwise all Channel s and instrument settings are overwritten with the stored settings Note After you us...

Page 468: ...ration results on page 288 Spectrograms Spectrogram trace data only available if spectrogram display is currently active 7 2 2 2 Storage Location and Filename The data is stored on the internal flash disk or if selected on a memory stick or net work drive The operating system firmware and stored instrument settings are located on drive C The storage location and filename are selected in a file sel...

Page 469: ...me 470 Comment 470 File Explorer 470 File Type 470 Items 470 Save File 470 Recall in New Channel Recall in Current Channel 471 Selecting Storage Location Drive Path Files Select the storage location of the file on the instrument or an external drive The default storage location for the SEM settings files is C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL sem_std Remote command MMEMory CATalog on page 912 Stor...

Page 470: ...es whether the global instrument settings with all Channel s are stored or recalled or the current Channel settings only Items Defines which data and settings are stored or are recalled Depending on the File Type either channel setups only or global settings are available Which items are available also depends on the installed options see also Chapter 7 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 468 Remote c...

Page 471: ...ings Select Recall in Current Chan nel to replace the current Channel settings Note After you use the Recall function the history of previous actions is deleted i e any actions performed previously cannot be undone or redone using the UNDO REDO keys Remote command MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 922 7 2 2 4 Startup Recall Settings Access Open icon in the toolbar Startup Recall Startup Recall 472 Select...

Page 472: ... same base name are extended by three numbers e g limit_lines_005 File names must be compatible with the Windows conventions for file names In partic ular they must not contain special characters such as For details on the filename and location see Chapter 7 2 2 2 Storage Location and Filename on page 468 Comment An optional description for the data file A maximum of 60 characters can be displayed...

Page 473: ...ther the instrument settings for all Channel s are stored or only those for the current Channel 6 Select the items to be saved with the settings Either the settings for the currently selected Channel only or the settings for all Channel s can be stored Various other items such as lines or traces etc can be stored as well see Chap ter 7 2 2 1 Stored Data Types on page 468 7 Select Save A file with ...

Page 474: ...tion dialog box select the recall settings to restore 4 Select Select File 5 Set Startup Recall to On Now when you press the PRESET key or reboot the instrument the defined set tings will be restored 6 To restore the factory preset settings set Startup Recall to Off 7 3 Import Export Functions Access Save Open icon in the toolbar Import Export The R S FPL1000 provides various evaluation methods fo...

Page 475: ...g trace data is only available via the Trace Config dialog box see Chap ter 6 13 2 Trace Data Ex Import on page 452 I Q data can only be imported by applications that process I Q data See the R S FPL1000 I Q Analyzer user manual for more information Export Access Save Recall Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Saves the selected trace or all traces in ...

Page 476: ...ke some time For details on the file format in the Spectrum application see Chapter 6 13 6 Refer ence ASCII File Export Format on page 457 Remote command MMEMory STORe n TRACe on page 828 MMEMory STORe n SPECtrogram on page 937 File Type Export Trace to ASCII File Export Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Depending on the external program in which the data file was ...

Page 477: ... Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications For details see the description in the R S FPL1000 I Q Analyzer User Manual Importing and Exporting I Q Data Note Storing large amounts of I Q data several Gigabytes can exceed the available internal storage space on the R S FPL1000 In this case it can be necessary to use an external storage medium File Explorer I Q Export Export Opens the ...

Page 478: ... print a screenshot of the current display with the current settings immediately with out switching to the Print menu use the Print immediately icon in the toolbar Print Content Settings 478 Print Preview Functions 481 Printer Settings 483 Page Setup 486 Print Color Settings 487 7 4 1 1 Print Content Settings Access Print Print Config Content tab The content settings determine which data is includ...

Page 479: ...9 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 Print Screenshot 480 Print Multiple Windows 480 Comment 480 Print Logo 480 Print Page Count 480 Print Dialog 480 Print Date and Time 481 Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 480: ...or the clipboard it is automatically changed to be a PDF file Remote command HCOPy CONTent on page 926 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 STATe on page 934 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe on page 932 Comment Defines an optional comment to be included in the printout of the display Maximum 120 characters are allowed Up to 60 characters fit in one line In the first line a man ual line feed can be forced at a...

Page 481: ...es or removes the current date and time at the bottom of the printout Remote command HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 on page 934 7 4 1 2 Print Preview Functions Access Print The Print Preview of the printout according to the current configuration is available in all Print Settings dialog tabs Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 482: ...Fit Page 483 Zoom 1 1 483 Page Up Page Down 483 Print 483 Zoom In Zoom Out Zooms into enlarges or zooms out of decreases the preview display Note that the zoom functions affect only the preview not the printout itself Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 483: ...ithin the preview to see the individual pages Print Starts to print or store the selected screen contents to a file see Chapter 7 4 1 1 Print Content Settings on page 478 Whether the output is sent to the printer or stored in a file or the clipboard depends on the selected print settings see Chapter 7 4 1 3 Printer Settings on page 483 If the output is stored to a file a file selection dialog box ...

Page 484: ...tination File 485 Destination Clipboard 485 Destination Printer 485 Suppress File Name Dialog 485 Printer Name 485 Print to file 485 Install Printer 486 Destination Defines the medium to which the printout is output Creating Screenshots of Current Measurement Results and Settings ...

Page 485: ...elect the clipboard as the printing destination the content setting is automati cally set to Print Screenshot Remote command HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate CLIPboard Destination Printer Destination Sends the printout to the printer selected from the Printer Name list Remote command HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter Suppress File Name Dialog If the Destination is a file the file selection dialog...

Page 486: ...are already installed are displayed Only user accounts with administrator rights can install a printer For further information refer to the Microsoft Windows documentation 7 4 1 4 Page Setup Access Print Print Config Page Setup tab Page settings are only available when printing on a printer or to a PDF file see Desti nation on page 484 Orientation 487 Windows Per Page 487 Scaling 487 Margins 487 C...

Page 487: ...age 478 If more than one window is printed on one page see Windows Per Page each win dow is printed in equal size Maintain aspect ratio Each window is printed as large as possible while maintaining the aspect ratio of the original display Size to fit Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regarding the aspect ratio of the original display Remote command HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCAL...

Page 488: ...ayed on the screen can be printed or stored to a file very easily For a programming example see Chapter 10 9 7 Examples Managing Data on page 947 To start printing or storing results to a file If the R S FPL1000 has already been set up according to your current require ments simply press the Print immediate icon at the far right end of the toolbar The current measurement display is printed or stor...

Page 489: ...e visible 3 In the Printer tab select Printer as the Destination 4 Select the Printer Name to print to from the list of installed printers 5 In the Page Setup tab configure the layout of the printout page a Select the page orientation b Define the page margins c Check the Print Preview to make sure all relevant elements of the display are visible 6 In the Color tab define the colors to be used for...

Page 490: ...lt you define the filename individually for each print operation To avoid having the File Selection dialog box being displayed for each print operation select Suppress File Name Dialog In this case the previously used or default storage location and filename are used C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user FPL_ScreenShot_ date and time 7 In the Page Setup tab configure the layout of t...

Page 491: ... Configure at least the following result displays Frequency Sweep Spectrogram Spectrum Magnitude Spectrum I Q Analyzer 2 Switch to the MultiView tab to display an overview of the result displays in all active channel setups 3 Select the Printer tool in the toolbar The Print Settings dialog box is displayed 4 Select Device 1 to configure the settings for this printing device 5 In the Content tab se...

Page 492: ...ge 16 In the Color tab select Screen Colors Print for a printout that reflects the col ors you see on the screen but with a white background 17 Check the Print Preview to make sure all required result displays are included and all relevant data elements are visible a Scroll through the individual pages of the printout using Page Up and Page Down b Use the zoom functions to make sure all relevant p...

Page 493: ...ned measurement specific contents You can create multiple templates for different applica tions Currently test reports are only supported in the Spectrum application and only if the option R S FPL1 K54 is installed Designing a Test Report Template 493 Managing Templates 502 Creating Datasets 503 Creating a Test Report 504 How to Create a Test Report 506 7 5 1 Designing a Test Report Template Acces...

Page 494: ...t consists of different types of information some of which are displayed on each page others per measurement subreport 1 2 6 5 3 7 4 Figure 7 2 Types of information in the test report 1 Logo each page 2 Global information each page 3 Measurement specific information per subreport 4 General instrument settings per subreport 5 Measurement specific settings per subreport 6 Measurement results per sub...

Page 495: ...General Contents Access Report menu Templates General General The General area defines general properties of the report document Page format 495 File type 495 Use Screen Colors 496 Date 496 Page Count 496 Report Path 496 Suppress Dialog 496 Raw Data Storage 496 Page format Selects the format of the document A4 or Letter format Remote command HCOPy TREPort PAGesize on page 945 File type Selects the...

Page 496: ...rectory using the but ton If you omit the path the report is saved in the default directory C Users Public Docu ments Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user Note This path defines the location of the actual test report Templates are stored in a different location see Save on page 503 Remote command MMEMory NAME on page 915 Suppress Dialog Report Path By default when you store a report a dialog is displayed t...

Page 497: ...7 5 1 2 Title Page Access Report menu Templates General Title Page You can define an optional title page for the test report with a title and a short descrip tion of the report contents It is only included in the report if you enable it Working with Test Reports ...

Page 498: ...8 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 Figure 7 3 Example of a test report title page State HCOPy TREPort TITLe STATe on page 947 Title HCOPy TREPort TITLe on page 947 Abstract HCOPy TREPort DESCription on page 939 Working with Test Reports ...

Page 499: ... lines to the report plus one picture for example a company logo The first line is a heading Each of the following five lines consists of a title and a value which is displayed next to the title The information can be global that is valid for the entire report or specific to an individual measurement In this case you define the actual value when you store the measurement data Figure 7 4 Dialog box...

Page 500: ...nt this title is used in the dialog box asking you to provide the information when you append the measurement results to the report Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line TITLe on page 940 Value Defines the actual text for the content defined by the title A maximum of 25 characters are available For data that is specific to an individual measurement you are asked to provide this inform...

Page 501: ...lename in the input field or select the directory using the button The following formats are supported bmp jpg png gif emf wmf Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM LOGO on page 942 7 5 1 4 Application Specific Contents For each application you can select which graphical results numerical results or infor mation on the measurement setup to include in the report Information that is to be included in th...

Page 502: ...o the report The rest is dismissed If you have more measurement points export the data to an ASCII file see Export Trace to ASCII File on page 454 Settings basic instrument and measurement specific settings as indicated in the channel setup bar Select All Select None Selects or deselects all items in the corresponding area Diagrams Tables All items Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM SELect on page ...

Page 503: ...guration Remote command HCOPy TREPort ITEM DEFault on page 939 7 5 3 Creating Datasets Access Toolbar Before you can print a test report you have to create report data Test report data is organized in datasets Each dataset contains the information for one measurement A dataset can contain several subsets for different kinds of data for a single measurement for example settings and a result summary...

Page 504: ...n page 938 7 5 4 Creating a Test Report Access Report menu Preview Once you have created datasets for a report you can create and save the actual test report Optionally you can select which of the saved datasets to include Before you save the test report to a file you can check a preview of the current configuration and contents File type 504 Save 505 Selecting items to include in the report 505 R...

Page 505: ...915 Print report HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 on page 929 Selecting items to include in the report By default all datasets and subsets stored for the test report are included see Chap ter 7 5 3 Creating Datasets on page 503 However you can remove individual data sets or subsets before creating the report Each dataset is indicated by the date and time it was stored A dataset can contain subsets for individu...

Page 506: ... data 3 Optionally in the Title Page area configure a separate title page with a title and description of the report 4 Optionally in the Measurement Information area configure further information on the measurement to be included in the report a Define a label Title b Enter the text for the label Value c Select whether the text is to appear on each page Global or only once per measurement Subrepor...

Page 507: ...ile selection dialog box is displayed unless you enabled the Suppress dialog option in the general template settings 11 Select the file name and path for the report 12 Select OK The test report is saved to the selected location To create subsequent test reports 1 Configure and perform your measurement as usual 2 When the measurement is finished save the results for your report From the toolbar sel...

Page 508: ...erence Frequency Access Setup Reference Int Ext The R S FPL1000 can use the internal reference source or an external reference source as the frequency standard for all internal oscillators A 10 MHz crystal oscillator is used as the internal reference source In the external reference setting all internal oscillators of the R S FPL1000 are synchronized to the external reference frequency External re...

Page 509: ...nt application or operating mode For information on optimizing your display for measurement results see the application specific result configuration descriptions General Display Settings 509 Displayed Items 511 Display Theme and Colors 514 External Monitor Settings 516 Touch screen Settings 517 8 2 1 1 General Display Settings Access Setup Display General This section includes general screen disp...

Page 510: ... DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe on page 961 Display Update Rate By default a fast update rate ensures the most recent measurement results on the dis play However when performance is poor due to slow data transfer for example during remote control it can be helpful to decrease the frequency with which the screen dis play is updated Set Date and Time Sets the current date and time for the internal real t...

Page 511: ...s are not accessible at all without the toolbar Remote command DISPlay TBAR STATe on page 960 Status Bar The status bar beneath the diagram indicates the global instrument settings the instru ment status and any irregularities during measurement or display Some of the information displayed in the status bar can be queried from the status reg istry via remote commands see Chapter 10 12 Using the St...

Page 512: ...quency and span settings The displayed span per division The number of sweep points Remote command DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency on page 960 Date and Time The date and time display can be switched off independently of the status bar You can set the current date and time and configure the display format in the General tab of the Display dialog box Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TIME on page 961 Fro...

Page 513: ...ore information see Chapter 8 2 2 How to Work with the Soft Front Panels on page 518 Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 962 Mini Front Panel If you require a front panel display but do not want to lose too much space for results in the display area a mini front panel is available The mini version displays only the main function keys in a separate window in the display area Display ...

Page 514: ...e keyboard language defined in the operating system That is useful when you are working from a remote PC and the front panel function is not active Remote command SYSTem DISPlay FPANel STATe on page 962 8 2 1 3 Display Theme and Colors Access Setup Display Theme Color You can configure the used colors and styles of display elements on the screen Display Settings ...

Page 515: ... the colors and style used to display softkeys and other screen objects The default theme is IndustrialDark Remote command DISPlay THEMe SELect on page 964 Print Colors Defines the color settings used for printout If Show Print Colors on Display is activated the currently selected print colors are displayed as a preview for your selection Display Settings ...

Page 516: ...func tion can be used as a preview for printing 8 2 1 4 External Monitor Settings Access Setup Display Configure Monitor You can connect an external monitor or projector to the DVI connector on the instru ment s rear panel Screen resolution and format The touchscreen of the R S FPL1000 is calibrated for a 16 10 format If you connect a monitor or projector using a different format e g 4 3 the calib...

Page 517: ...tup Display Touch These options concern the behavior of the firmware for touch gestures on the screen Note that these settings remain unchanged after a channel preset Level Lock 517 X Lock 518 Y Lock 518 Adapt Measurement to Zoom selected diagram 518 Level Lock If activated default the reference level and thus the attenuation is locked that is remains unchanged during touch gestures on the screen ...

Page 518: ...se of the rotary knob use the additional keys displayed between the keypad and the arrow keys Icon Function Turn left Enter Turn right Mini front panel The mini front panel provides only the keys on the touchscreen to operate the R S FPL1000 via an external monitor or remote desktop By default the Auto close option is activated and the mini front panel window closes automatically after you select ...

Page 519: ...f available languages The software defined interface elements such as softkeys dialog boxes diagram texts etc are displayed in the selected language Remote command SYSTem DISPlay LANGuage on page 964 8 4 System Configuration Settings Access Setup System Configuration Hardware Information 519 Information on Versions and Options 520 System Messages 521 Firmware Updates 522 General Configuration Sett...

Page 520: ...firmware options in this dialog box The table also contains The open source acknowledgements PDF file for the firmware and other software packages used by the R S FPL1000 The European License Agreement EULA for LucasFonts RSCorpid Expired option licenses If an option is about to expire a message box is displayed to inform you You can then use the Install Option function to enter a new license key ...

Page 521: ...ile containing copyright information on the IVI shared components used by the R S FPL1000 firmware Install Option Opens an edit dialog box to enter the license key for the option that you want to install Install Option by XML Opens a file selection dialog box to install an additional option to the R S FPL1000 using an XML file Enter or browse for the name of an XML file that contains the option ke...

Page 522: ...ic error code Message brief description of the message Component hardware messages name of the affected module software messages name of the affected software Date Time date and time of the occurrence of the message Remote command SYSTem ERRor LIST on page 970 8 4 4 Firmware Updates Access Setup System Configuration Firmware Update During instrument start the installed hardware is checked against ...

Page 523: ...or browse for the firmware installation file and press the Install but ton Remote command SYSTem FIRMware UPDate on page 971 How to Update the Instrument Firmware 1 Download the update package from the Rohde Schwarz website and store it on a memory stick on the instrument or on a server network drive that can be accessed by the instrument 2 NOTICE Stop measurement The firmware update must not be p...

Page 524: ...t is recommended that you perform a self alignment after the update see Chap ter 8 8 4 How to Align the Instrument on page 546 8 4 5 General Configuration Settings Access Setup System Configuration Config General system settings for example concerning the initial behaviour of the R S FPL1000 after booting can also be configured Out of range value behavior 524 Out of range value behavior By default...

Page 525: ... instrument is ready to receive a trigger Remote command OUTPut UPORt WTRigger POLarity LOW HIGH see the R S FPL1000 user manual 8 5 Service Functions Access Setup Service When unexpected problems arise with the R S FPL1000 some service functions may help you solve them For more helpful information for support see also Chapter 11 6 Collecting Information for Support on page 1026 R S Support Inform...

Page 526: ... the instrument The file name consists of the unique device ID and the current date and time of the file creation If you contact the Rohde Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SINFo on page 973 Save Device Footprint Creates an xml file with information on installed hardw...

Page 527: ...he corresponding test results are indicated A running Sequencer process is aborted when you start a self test If you start a self test remotely then select the Local softkey while the test is still run ning the instrument only returns to the manual operation state after the test is comple ted In this case the self test cannot be aborted Remote command TST on page 604 DIAGnostic SERVice STESt RESul...

Page 528: ...DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 953 DIAGnostic SERVice INPut PULSed CFRequency on page 953 Frequency Calibration Frequency RF Defines the frequency of the internal broadband calibration signal to be used for IF fil ter calibration max 64 MHz Calibration Frequency MW Uses the microwave calibration signal as the RF input This function is used to cali brate the YIG filter on the microwave con...

Page 529: ...f the functions can only be used after entering a password These functions are described in the instrument service manual Service Function 529 Send 529 Clear History 530 Password 530 Clear Results 530 Save Results 530 Result List 530 Service Function Selects the service function by its numeric code or textual name The selection list includes all functions previously selected since the last Clear H...

Page 530: ...SERVice SFUNction RESults DELete on page 972 Save Results Opens a file selection dialog box to save the results of all previously performed service functions to a file Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice SFUNction RESults SAVE on page 973 Result List The Results List indicates the status and results of the executed service functions 8 6 Toolbar Configuration If the list of available icons becomes lo...

Page 531: ... The icon is moved to the menu of hidden icons More icons Empty spaces are indicated by a spacer 5 To insert additional spaces between icons for example to create groups of icons a Select More icons Drag Spacer b Drag and drop the Drag Spacer at the required position in the toolbar Multiple spaces can be inserted 6 To restore the default R S FPL1000 toolbar select More icons Set to Default 7 To ex...

Page 532: ...s active TDF is displayed in the channel bar Y Axis Unit The individual transducer factors can be defined as absolute values or relative dB values However all factors for one transducer line use the same unit As soon as a transducer is activated the unit of the transducer is automatically used for all the level settings and outputs The unit cannot be changed in the amplitude settings since the R S...

Page 533: ...ways remember to store the settings again after changing the transducer factors See Chapter 7 2 Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings and Measurement Data on page 464 Recalling transducer factors stored with measurement settings After recalling measurement settings the transducer factors applied to the measure ment may be different to those displayed in the Transducer dialog box see Saving and...

Page 534: ...ils on settings for individual lines see Chapter 8 7 2 2 Transducer Factors on page 536 For instructions on configuring and working with transducers see Chapter 8 7 4 How to Configure the Transducer on page 539 Name 534 Unit 534 Compatibility 535 Activating Deactivating 535 Comment 535 Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter 535 Adjust Ref Level 535 Create New Line 535 Edit Line 536 Copy...

Page 535: ... transducer line Included Transducer Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored transducer lines are included in the overview The view can be restricted to compatible transducer lines only or include all transducer lines found Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Adjust Ref Level Activates or deactivates the automatic adjustment of the refere...

Page 536: ...ection TRANsducer DELete on page 957 8 7 2 2 Transducer Factors Access Setup Transducer Edit Line Copy Line New Line The settings and functions available for individual transducer lines are described here For instructions on creating and editing transducer lines see Chapter 8 7 4 How to Configure the Transducer on page 539 Name 537 Comment 537 Unit 537 X Axis Scaling 537 Data Points 537 Insert Val...

Page 537: ...n TRANsducer UNIT on page 957 X Axis Scaling Describes the scaling of the horizontal axis on which the data points of the transducer line are defined Scaling can be linear or logarithmic Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer SCALing on page 957 Data Points Each transducer line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 50 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and va...

Page 538: ...ransducer factor from the selected file in CSV format Note that a valid import file must contain a minimum of required information for the R S FPL1000 For details on the file format see Chapter 8 7 3 Reference Trans ducer Factor File Format on page 539 Remote command MMEMory LOAD n TFACtor on page 958 File Explorer Import Opens the Microsoft Windows File Explorer Remote command not supported Expor...

Page 539: ...r data sep Separator for individual values required by Microsoft Excel for example Type RS_TransducerFactor Type of data FileFormatVersion 1 00 File format version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage OptionID SpectrumAnalyzer Application the transducer factor was created for Name TestTDF1 Transducer factor name Comment Transducer for device A Description of transducer factor XAxisScaling LIN...

Page 540: ...on Show Compatible All transducer lines stored on the instrument that are compatible to the current measurement settings are displayed in the overview How to activate and deactivate a transducer 1 To activate a transducer select a transducer line in the overview and select the Active setting for it The trace is automatically recalculated for the next sweep after a transducer line is activated 2 To...

Page 541: ...utton The new transducer line is displayed in the overview and can be activated How to delete an existing transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Delete button 3 Confirm the message The transducer line is deleted After the next sweep the originally measured val ues are displayed How to configure a new transducer line 1 In the Transducer dialog box sel...

Page 542: ...tally Thus a new transducer line can be easily generated based upon an existing transducer line which has been shifted 1 In the Line Config dialog box select the transducer line 2 Select the Edit button 3 In the Edit Transducer Line dialog box select the Shift x or Shift y button and define the shift width 4 Save the shifted data points by selecting the Save button If activated the trace is recalc...

Page 543: ...The results are available until the next self alignment process is started or the instru ment is switched off Temperature check During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is measured as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely This temperature is used as a reference for a continuous temperature check during operation If the current temperature deviates from the stored self ...

Page 544: ...ignment 545 Schedule 545 Shut down Device after Self Alignment 545 Starting Touch Screen Alignment 545 Alignment Results 545 Start Self Alignment Starts recording correction data for the instrument If the correction data acquisition fails or if the correction values are deactivated a corresponding message is displayed in the status field For details see Chapter 8 8 1 Basics on Alignment on page 54...

Page 545: ...After the warmup operation has completed self alignment is star ted automatically Schedule If enabled a self alignment is performed regularly at specific days and time Enter the time according to the format specified in Date and Time Format on page 510 Shut down Device after Self Alignment If activated the R S FPL1000 is automatically shut down after self alignment is com pleted Note that the inst...

Page 546: ... been checked successfully a message is dis played 8 8 4 How to Align the Instrument Operating temperature Before performing this functional test make sure that the instrument has reached its operating temperature for details refer to the data sheet To perform a self alignment Make sure no signal is connected to the RF input connector Running a self alignment with a signal connected to the RF inpu...

Page 547: ...en To align the touchscreen 1 Press the Setup key 2 Select the Alignment softkey 3 Select Touch Screen Alignment A blinking cross appears in the lower left corner of the screen 4 Touch and hold the blinking cross until it stops blinking Repeat this action for the crosses in the other corners Alignment ...

Page 548: ...l information on remote control of spectrum analyzers see the following documents available from the Rohde Schwarz website Remote control via SCPI 1EF62 Hints and Tricks for Remote Control of Spectrum and Network Analyzers 1MA171 How to use Rohde Schwarz Instruments in MATLAB 1MA208 Fast Remote Instrument Control with HiSLIP How to configure the remote control interfaces is described in Chapter 9 ...

Page 549: ...be integrated in a LAN the instrument is equipped with a LAN interface consisting of a connector a network interface card and protocols The network card can be oper ated with the following interfaces 10 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3 100 Mbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 1Gbit s Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab For remote control via a network the PC and the instrument must be connected via the LAN interface to a comm...

Page 550: ...ese instruments by the resource string For details on configuring the LAN connection see Chapter 9 5 1 How to Configure a Network on page 578 LAN Web Browser Interface 550 9 1 1 1 LAN Web Browser Interface The LAN web browser interface allows for easy configuration of the LAN and remote control of the R S FPL1000 without additional installation requirements The instrument s LAN web browser interfa...

Page 551: ...lcome page opens The navigation pane of the browser interface contains the following elements LAN Home opens the instrument home page The home page displays device information including the VISA resource string in read only format The Device Indicator button allows you to physically identify the instrument This is useful if you have several instruments and want to know which instru ment the LAN ho...

Page 552: ...ter or unregister licenses Help www rohde schwarz com opens the Rohde Schwarz home page 9 2 Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface using the STATus commands ...

Page 553: ...9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 LMARgin 1 FAIL LMARgin 2 FAIL LMARgin 3 FAIL LMARgin 4 FAIL LMARgin 5 FAIL LMARgin 6 FAIL LMARgin 7 FAIL LMARgin 8 FAIL not used 15 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES EXTended not used Sweep time too low 15 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 0 1 2 STAT QUES FREQuency not used OVEN COLD LO UNLocked External REFerence STAT QUES LIMit n LIMit 1 FAIL LIMit 2 FAIL LIMit 3 FAIL LIMit 4 FAIL LIMit 5 FAIL LIMit 6 FAIL ...

Page 554: ...w of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower regis ters A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDition part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to...

Page 555: ...d the associated ENABle bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register 9 2 2 2 IST Flag and Parallel Poll Enable Register PPE As with the SRQ the IST flag combines the entire status information in a single bit It can be read by means of a parallel poll or using the command IS...

Page 556: ...An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument 9 2 2 4 STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register contains information on current activities of the...

Page 557: ...QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific subregisters In this case you must check the subregister of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a subregister always returns the result for the currently selected channel Table 9 5 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit...

Page 558: ...es more information on the error type 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if the R S FPL1000 is not synchronized to the signal that is applied The R S FPL1000 is not synchronized if it cannot synchronize to midamble during a measurement or premeasurement it cannot find a burst during a measurement or premeasurement the results deviate too much from the expected value during premeasurements 12 ...

Page 559: ...3 11 LOWer UPPer FAIL This bit is set if the limit is exceeded in one of the lower or upper alternate channels 3 11 7 CACLR FAIL This bit is set if the CACLR limit is exceeded in one of the gap channels 8 14 Unused 15 This bit is always 0 9 2 2 7 STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register The STATus QUEStionable EXTended register contains further status information not covered by the other status regis...

Page 560: ...e g the settings no longer match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily 3 ERRor This bit is set if an error occurs during a measurement e g due to missing data or wrong set tings so that the measurement cannot be completed correctly 4 FATal This bit is set if a serious error occurs in the application and regular operation is no longer possi ble 5 ...

Page 561: ...out the register with STATus QUEStionable LIMit n CONDition or STATus QUEStionable LIMit n EVENt Table 9 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 LIMit 1 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 1 is violated 1 LIMit 2 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 2 is violated 2 LIMit 3 FAIL This bit is set if limit line 3 is violated 3 LIMit 4 FAIL This bit is set if...

Page 562: ...gin 6 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 6 is violated 6 LMARgin 7 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 7 is violated 7 LMARgin 8 FAIL This bit is set if limit margin 8 is violated 8 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 9 2 2 12 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register The STATus QUEStionable POWer register contains information about possible overload situations that may occur during operation of th...

Page 563: ...ature register exists for each active channel You can read out the register with STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition or STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt Table 9 13 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No Meaning 0 This bit is set if the frontend temperature sensor deviates by a certain degree from the self alignment temperature During warmup this ...

Page 564: ...e Clear RST or SYS Tem PRE Set STA Tus PRE Set CLS Effect 0 1 Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear PPE yes Clear EVENt parts of the regis ters yes yes Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other registers with 1 yes yes Fill PTRansition parts with 1 Clear NTRansition parts yes yes Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes y...

Page 565: ... sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure 8568B_DC Uses DC input coupling by default if supported by the instrument 8591E Compatible to 8594E 8594E Command sets A and B are available Command sets A and B differ in the rules regarding the command structure CXA EXA R S FSV R S FSL Notes If you select a language other than SCPI the GPIB addre...

Page 566: ...esponding frequency of the R S FPL1000 if required 9 4 Network and Remote Control Settings Access SETUP Network Remote The remote commands required to define these settings are described in Chap ter 10 10 6 Configuring the Network and Remote Control on page 964 Step by step instructions are provided in Chapter 9 5 How to Set Up a Network and Remote Control on page 577 General Network Settings 566 ...

Page 567: ...onfiguration 568 Computer Name Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed The naming conventions of Windows apply If too many characters and or numbers are entered an error message is displayed in the status line The default instrument name is a non case sensitive string with the following syntax Type variant serial_number For example FPL1003 123456 Th...

Page 568: ...erver is available DHCP On this setting is read only The subnet mask consists of four number blocks separated by dots Each block con tains 3 numbers in maximum e g 100 100 100 100 but also one or two numbers are allowed in a block as an example see the preinstalled address DHCP Switches between DHCP server available On or not available Off If a DHCP server is available in the network the IP addres...

Page 569: ...ed The default address is 20 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF ADDRess on page 965 Identification String Defines the identification string for the R S FPL1000 which is provided as a response to the IDN query Maximum 36 characters are allowed Remote command SYSTem IDENtify STRing on page 966 Reset to Factory String Restores the default identification string Each R S FPL1000 has a unique I...

Page 570: ... be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in this particular case This can be avoided by using only the receive terminator EOI Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB SELF RTERminator on page 965 I O Logging Activates or deactivates the SCPI error log function All remote control commands received by the R S FPL1000 are recorded in a log file The f...

Page 571: ... R S FPL1000 can emulate the GPIB interface of other signal and spectrum ana lyzers e g in order to use existing control applications Compatibility with former R S signal and spectrum analyzers As a rule the R S FPL1000 supports most commands from previous R S signal and spectrum analyzers such as the FSQ FSP FSU or FSV However the default values in particular the number of sweep points or particu...

Page 572: ... applications as in legacy systems Remote command SYSTem LANGuage on page 975 IF Gain Configures the internal IF gain settings in HP emulation mode due to the application needs This setting is only taken into account for resolution bandwidth 300 kHz NORM Optimized for high dynamic range overload limit is close to reference level PULS Optimized for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above re...

Page 573: ...sion Resets the response to the REV query for the revision number to the factory default HP emulation only see Language on page 572 Remote command SYSTem REVision FACTory on page 968 9 4 4 LAN Settings Access SETUP Network Remote LAN tab In a LAN network the R S FPL1000 can be accessed via any web browser e g the Microsoft Internet Explorer to perform the following tasks Modifying network configur...

Page 574: ... page 567 MAC address Media Access Control address MAC address a unique identifier for the network card in the R S FPL1000 IP address IP address of the R S FPL1000 as defined in the operating system see also IP Address on page 568 LAN Password Password for LAN configuration The default password is LxiWebIfc Remote command SYSTem LXI PASSword on page 967 LAN Reset Resets the LAN configuration to it...

Page 575: ...face Remote command SYSTem LXI LANReset on page 967 9 4 5 Remote Errors Access SETUP Network Remote Remote Errors tab The error messages generated by the R S FPL1000 during remote operation are dis played here The messages are displayed in the order of their occurrence the most recent mes sages are placed at the top of the list The most recent error message during remote operation can be displayed...

Page 576: ...ote control mode In remote control mode all keys of the instrument except the PRESET key are dis abled The LOCAL softkey and the Remote Display Update softkey are displayed Local The instrument switches from remote to manual operation Note If the local lockout function LLO has been activated in the remote control mode manual operation is no longer available until GTL is executed Before you switch ...

Page 577: ...fect the entire network Remote operation You can operate the instrument remotely from a connected computer using SCPI com mands Before you send remote commands you must configure the instrument in a LAN network or connect it to a PC via the GPIB interface as described in Chap ter 9 5 1 How to Configure a Network on page 578 Remote Desktop In production test and measurement a common requirement is ...

Page 578: ...g network made with an ordinary RJ 45 network cable The instrument is assigned an IP address and can coexist with a computer and with other hosts on the same network A dedicated network connection Point to point connection between the instru ment and a single computer made with a crossover RJ 45 network cable The computer must be equipped with a network adapter and is directly connected to the ins...

Page 579: ... to determine the IP address on page 580 Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your net work administrator to obtain a valid IP address Assigning the IP address on the instrument...

Page 580: ...guration is saved and you are prompted to restart the instrument 8 Confirm the displayed message Yes button to restart the instrument Using a DNS server to determine the IP address If a DNS server is configured on the R S FPL1000 the server can determine the cur rent IP address for the connection using the permanent computer name 1 Obtain the name of your DNS domain and the IP addresses of the DNS...

Page 581: ...e IP address The DNS server translates the host name to the IP address This is especially useful when a DHCP server is used as a new IP address may be assigned each time the instrument is restarted Each instrument is delivered with an assigned computer name but this name can be changed To change the instrument s computer name 1 Press the Setup key and then the Network Remote softkey The current Co...

Page 582: ...trument home page displays device information including the VISA resource string in read only format Press the Device Indicator button on the Instrument Home Page to activate or deactivate the LAN status LED to the right of the button A green LAN status LED indicates that a LAN connection has been established a red status LED indi cates an error for example that no LAN cable is connected When a de...

Page 583: ... Link Local Addressing Automatic IP to obtain the instrument IP address Changing the LAN configuration is password protected The default password is Lxi WebIfc notice upper and lower case characters You can change the LAN password in the Network Remote dialog box see Chap ter 9 4 4 LAN Settings on page 573 Advanced LAN Configuration The LAN Configuration Advanced LAN Configuration parameters are u...

Page 584: ...lue between 0 and 30 Remote command SYST COMM GPIB ADDR 18 9 5 2 How to Operate the Instrument Without a Network To operate the instrument without a network connection either temporarily or perma nently no special measures are necessary Windows automatically detects the inter ruption of the network connection and does not set up the connection when the instru ment is switched on If you are not pro...

Page 585: ...rk Thus a matching user must be created in the R S FPL1000 and in the network the password must be adapted to the network password and the auto login mechanism must then be deactivated The network administrator is responsible for creating new users in the network 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 Select Start Settings Accounts Other users 3 Select Add someon...

Page 586: ...ogin 4 Save the changes to the file 5 In the Windows Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 6 Enter the command C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user user AUTOLOGIN REG 7 Press the ENTER key to confirm The auto login function is reactivated with the changed password It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on Switching users when using the auto logi...

Page 587: ...it perform the follow ing steps 1 In the Start menu select Run The Run dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the command C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user user AUTOLOGIN REG 3 Press the ENTER key to confirm The auto login function is reactivated It will be applied the next time the instrument is switched on 9 5 4 How to Share Directories only with Microsoft Networks Sharing directorie...

Page 588: ... Enter the IP address of the R S FPL1000 in the browser s address bar The R S FPL1000 s Welcome page is displayed 3 In the navigation pane select Instrument Control Web Control The instrument s display is shown in a new browser window with a software front panel displayed beside or below it 4 Use the mouse cursor to access the functionality in the software front panel or in the display as you woul...

Page 589: ... selection dialog box and select the required file on the PC c Select Upload to copy the file from the PC to the defined folder on the R S FPL1000 9 5 6 How to Deactivate the Web Browser Interface If you want to prevent other users in the LAN from accessing or operating the R S FPL1000 via its LAN web browser interface you must deactivate this function Note that after a firmware update the functio...

Page 590: ...ter and Remote Desktop provides access to all of the applications files and net work resources of the instrument Thus remote operation of the R S FPL1000 is pos sible With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system For other ver sions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on For details refer to the Windows operating system documentation With the factor...

Page 591: ...ed This address must first be determined on the instrument itself Thus using a DHCP server is not suitable for remote operation of the R S FPL1000 via Remote Desktop 2 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 3 In the Windows Start menu select Settings System 4 Search for remote access 5 Select Allow remote access to your computer 6 Define which users are to be given a...

Page 592: ...sktop Client With Windows Remote Desktop Client is part of the operating system and can be accessed via Start Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection For other versions of Windows Microsoft offers the Remote Desktop Client as an add on 1 Select the Windows icon in the toolbar to access the operating system 2 From the Start menu select All Programs Accessories Remote Desktop Connection The R...

Page 593: ... is the options are activated or deactivated 6 To improve the performance you can deactivate the Desktop background Show contents of window while dragging and Menu and window animation options 7 Open the Local Resources tab for enabling printers local drives and serial inter faces 8 If you will need to access drives of the controller from the R S FPL1000 e g in order to store settings or to copy f...

Page 594: ...R S FPL1000 activate the Printers option Do not change the remaining set tings 10 Open the Display tab The options for configuring the R S FPL1000 screen display are displayed 11 Under Remote desktop size you can set the size of the R S FPL1000 window on the desktop of the controller 12 Under Colors do not change the settings 13 Set the Display the connection bar when I use the full screen option ...

Page 595: ...rd user In the Password field enter 894129 3 To save the connection configuration for later use a Select the Save As button The Save As dialog box is displayed b Enter the name for the connection information RDP 4 To load an existing connection configuration a Select the Open button The Open dialog box is displayed b Select the RDP file 5 Select the Connect button The connection is set up 6 If the...

Page 596: ...p application window The Windows Start menu can be made available by expanding the Remote Desktop window to full size During the connection with the controller the login entry is displayed on the R S FPL1000 screen To terminate Remote Desktop control The connection can be terminated by the controller or by a user at the R S FPL1000 1 On the controller close the Remote Desktop window at any time Th...

Page 597: ... be operated via the front panel To start remote control 1 Send an addressed command GTR Go to Remote from a controller to the instru ment The instrument is switched to remote control remote state Operation via the front panel is disabled Only the Local softkey is displayed to return to manual operation The instrument remains in the remote state until it is reset to the manual state via the instru...

Page 598: ...you switch off the display For details see Remote Display Update on page 570 9 5 9 How to Return to Manual Operation Before you switch back to manual operation all remote command processing must be completed Otherwise the instrument will switch back to remote control immediately Select the Local softkey or use the following GPIB command status viGpibControlREN vi VI_GPIB_REN_ADDRESS_GTL If you sel...

Page 599: ...ult Displays 739 Setting Basic Spectrum RF Measurement Parameters 748 Managing Settings and Results 910 Configuring the R S FPL1000 951 Emulating Other Instruments Commands 974 Using the Status Register 1007 Deprecated Commands 1019 10 1 Conventions Used in SCPI Command Descriptions The following conventions are used in the remote command descriptions Command usage If not specified otherwise comma...

Page 600: ... link to the description is inserted 10 2 Common Suffixes In the Spectrum application the following common suffixes are used in remote com mands Table 10 1 Common suffixes used in remote commands in the Spectrum application Suffix Value range Description m 1 to 16 Marker n 1 to 16 Window in the currently selected channel setup t 1 to 6 Trace li 1 to 8 Limit line 10 3 Common Commands Common command...

Page 601: ...n See Start Self Alignment on page 544 CLS Clear status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer Usage Setting only ESE Value Event status enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value ...

Page 602: ...mands have been execu ted This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query writes a 1 into the output buffer when all preceding commands have been executed which is useful for command synchronization OPT Option identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the data sheet Return values Options The q...

Page 603: ...lue Range 0 to 255 PSC Action Power on status clear Determines whether the contents of the ENABle registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on status clear flag Parameters Action 0 1 0 The con...

Page 604: ...ons waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem TRG corresponds to the INITiate IMMediate command see INITiate n IMMediate on page 616 Usage Event TST Self test query Initiates self tests of the instrument and returns an error code Note If you start a self test remotely then select the Local s...

Page 605: ...oot 605 SYSTem SHUTdown 605 SYSTem CLOGging State This command turns logging of remote commands on and off Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Writes all remote commands that have been sent to a file The destination is C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer ScpiLogging ScpiLog no where no is a sequential number A new log file is started each time logging was stopped and is restarted OFF 0 RS...

Page 606: ... the MultiView tab and the most recently displayed channel setup If only one channel setup is active this command has no effect Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected channel setup i e creates a new chan nel setup of the same type and with the identical measurement settings...

Page 607: ...Name2 This command replaces a channel setup with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the channel setup you want to replace ChannelType Channel type of the new channel setup For a list of available channel setup types see INSTrument LIST on page 608 ChannelName2 String containing the name of the new channel setup Note If the specified name for a new channel set...

Page 608: ...ables below Tip to change the channel setup name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 channel setups ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Changing the Channel Setup Name on page 64 See Defining a channel setup on page 82 See New Channel Setup on page 83 Table 10 2 Available channel setup types and default channel setup n...

Page 609: ... Changing the Channel Setup Name on page 64 INSTrument SELect ChannelType ChannelName This command activates a new channel setup with the defined channel setup type or selects an existing channel setup with the specified name Also see INSTrument CREate NEW on page 607 Parameters ChannelType Channel type of the new channel setup For a list of available channel setup types see INSTrument LIST on pag...

Page 610: ...er IMMediate on page 610 Usage Event Manual operation See Sequencer State on page 86 INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 611 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement w...

Page 611: ... the first one and continues until it is stopped explicitely RST CONTinuous Manual operation See Sequencer Mode on page 86 SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur A detailed programming example is provided in Chapter 10 5 3 Programming Exam ple Performing ...

Page 612: ...ch back to first default analyzer channel INST SEL Spectrum WAI Switch into SEM SENSe SWEep MODE ESPectrum Load Sem standard file for W CDMA SENSe ESPectrum PRESet STANdard WCDMA 3GPP DL 3GPP_DL xml Set sweep count in Spectrum channel SENS SWEEP COUNT 5 Creating a second measurement channel Create second IQ channel INSTrument CREate NEW IQ IQ 2 Set sweep count SENS SWEEP COUNT 2 Change trace modes...

Page 613: ...LCulate MARKer MAXimum CALC MARK Y Change sweep time in IQ SENS SWE TIME 300us Switch to single Sequencer mode INITiate SEQuencer MODE SINGle Sweep all channels once taking the sweep count in each channel into account INITiate SEQuencer IMMediate OPC Set marker to maximum in IQ1 and query result CALCulate MARKer MAXimum CALC MARK Y Switch to second IQ channel and retrieve results INST SEL IQ 2 WAI...

Page 614: ...rcept Point 713 Measuring the AM Modulation Depth 717 Remote Commands for EMI Measurements 719 List Evaluations 728 Measuring the Pulse Power 732 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep 736 10 6 1 Performing Measurements Useful commands for performing measurements described elsewhere INITiate n ESPectrum on page 649 INITiate n SPURious on page 677 Remote commands exclusive for perfo...

Page 615: ...el performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event INITiate n CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at...

Page 616: ...ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 97 See Zero Span on page 97 See Continuous Sweep Run Cont on page 331 INITiate n IMMediate This command starts a s...

Page 617: ...mode Return values CurrentCount Example SWE COUNt 64 Sets sweep count to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT Starts a sweep without waiting for the sweep end SWE COUN CURR Queries the number of started sweeps Usage Query only 10 6 2 Configuring Power Measurements The following commands work for several power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb MODE 617 CALCulate n M...

Page 618: ...ode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant sb Multi SEM 1 to 3 for all other measurements irrelevant Parameters Measurement ACPower MCACpower ACLR measurements also known as adjacent channel power or multicarrier adjacent channel measurements Returns the power for every active transmission and adjacent channel The order is power of the transmission channels pow...

Page 619: ...e if the power reference type is set to peak power see SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe on page 666 OBANdwidth OBWidth Occupied bandwidth Returns the occupied bandwidth in Hz COBandwidth COBWidth Centroid frequency Frequency offset See Chapter 6 2 6 2 OBW Results on page 155 Manual operation See C N on page 151 See C N0 on page 151 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect MeasType This command select...

Page 620: ...e ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The power measurement selected with CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb SELect is activated OFF 0 A standard frequency sweep is activated RST 0 Manual operation See C N on page 151 See C N0 on page 151 SENSe POWer ACHannel PRESet Measurement This command determines the ideal span bandwidths and detector for the current power measurement To get a valid result you have to perfor...

Page 621: ...s current measurements and performs a series of test sweeps After it has finished the test it continues with the actual measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end This is only possible in single sweep mode SENSe POWer TRACe TraceNumber This command selects the trace channel power measurements are performed on For the measurement to ...

Page 622: ...CMEasurement RESult CVALue 623 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult P1DB STAT 623 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult P3DB STAT 624 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult PNDB STAT 624 CONFigure CMEasurement STATe 624 FETCh CMEasurement P1DB RESult 625 FETCh CMEasurement P3DB RESult 625 FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult 625 CONFigure CMEasurement REFerence VALue ReferenceValue Defines the reference value used to calculate...

Page 623: ...to the reference trace Default unit DB Example Enable calculation CONF CME REF PNDB ON Define compression value CONF CME RES CVAL 5 Query results FETC CME PNDB Manual operation See Compression Points on page 125 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult P1DB STAT State Enables or disables the calculation of the 1 dB compression point To query the results of the 1 dB compression point measurement use FETCh CME...

Page 624: ...5 CONFigure CMEasurement RESult PNDB STAT State Enables or disables the calculation of the n dB compression point To define the compression value use CONFigure CMEasurement RESult CVALue on page 623 To query the results of the n dB compression point measurement use FETCh CMEasurement PNDB RESult on page 625 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on R...

Page 625: ...mpression value use CONFigure CMEasure ment RESult CVALue Example FETC CME PDNB Result 3 dBm 3 dBm Usage Query only Manual operation See Compression Points on page 125 10 6 3 2 Programming Example Measuring Compression Points This example demonstrates how to determine compression points for an amplifier in a remote environment Configuring the measurement Reset the instrument RST Configure internal...

Page 626: ... the Reference Channel 633 Checking Limits 634 Performing an ACLR Measurement 641 Retrieving and Analyzing Measurement Results 641 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements 642 10 6 4 1 Managing Measurement Configurations The following commands control measurement configurations for ACLR measure ments CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb PRESet 626 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer s...

Page 627: ... containing ACLR standards Suffix n Window m Marker sb Multi SEM 1 to 3 for all other measurements irrelevant Return values Standards List of standard files Usage Query only Manual operation See User Standards on page 135 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb STANdard DELete Standard This command deletes a file containing an ACLR standard Suffix n Window m Marker sb irrelevant Parameters Standard...

Page 628: ...h 629 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth ALTernate ch 629 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth CHANnel ch 629 SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch 629 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ACHannel 629 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME ALTernate ch 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel NAME CHANnel ch 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing CHANnel ch 631 SE...

Page 629: ...l you have to set the bandwidth of the 3rd channel first Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters Bandwidth Range 100 Hz to 1000 MHz RST 14 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Channel Bandwidth on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel BWIDth CHANnel ch Bandwidth SENSe POWer ACHannel BANDwidth CHANnel ch Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the transmission channels Suffix ...

Page 630: ...el Names on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel Spacing This command defines the distance from transmission channel to adjacent channel Parameters Spacing Range 100 Hz to 2000 MHz RST 14 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ALTernate ch Spacing This command defines the distance from transmission channel to alternate channels ...

Page 631: ...set the spacing between the 2nd and 3rd chan nel first Suffix ch 1 n Tx channel number Parameters Spacing Range 14 kHz to 2000 MHz RST 20 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Channel Spacings on page 139 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt Number This command defines the number of transmission channels The command works for measurements in the frequency domain Parameters Number Range 1 to 18 ...

Page 632: ...lpha value for the weighting filter for all channels Parameters Value RST 0 22 Example POW ACH FILT ALPH ALL 0 35 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer ALPHa ALTernate ch Alpha This command defines the roll off factor for the alternate channel weighting filter Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters Alpha Roll off factor Range 0 to 1 RST 0 22 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENS...

Page 633: ...ILTer STATe ALTernate ch State This command turns the weighting filter for an alternate channel on and off Suffix ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Weighting Filters on page 141 SENSe POWer ACHannel FILTer STATe CHANnel ch State This command turns the weighting filter for a transmission channel on and off Suffix ch 1 n Tx channel number Paramete...

Page 634: ...arameters RefChannel MINimum MAXimum LHIGhest MINimum Transmission channel with the lowest power MAXimum Transmission channel with the highest power LHIGhest Lowest transmission channel for lower adjacent channels and highest transmission channel for upper adjacent channels Example POW ACH REF TXCH AUTO MAX Selects the channel with the peak power as reference channel Manual operation See Reference...

Page 635: ... ch RELative STATe 640 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe 640 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel ABSolute LowerLimit UpperLimit This command defines the absolute limit of the adjacent channels If you have defined an absolute limit as well as a relative limit the R S FPL1000 uses the lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters LowerLimit The limit of the lower ad...

Page 636: ...e lower value for the limit check Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters LowerLimit The limit of the lower adjacent channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB UpperLimit The limit of the upper adjacent channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RESult This command queries the state of the...

Page 637: ...e 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RELative STATe State State This command turns the relative limit check for the adjacent channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 Relative limit check for lower adjacent channel RST 0 State ON OFF 1 0...

Page 638: ...T 200 dBm Default unit dBm Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch ABSolute STATe State State This command turns the absolute limit check for the alternate channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch 1 n Alternate channel nu...

Page 639: ...rLimit The limit of the upper alternate channel Range 0 dB to 100 dB RST 0 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See Limit Check on page 140 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RESult This command queries the state of the limit check for the adjacent or alternate chan nels in an ACLR measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end o...

Page 640: ... limit check for the alternate channels on and off You have to activate the general ACLR limit check before using this command with CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower STATe Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant ch 1 n Alternate channel number Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 Relative limit check for lower alternate channel RST 0 State ON OFF 1 0 Relative limit check for upper alternate channel RST 0 Manual opera...

Page 641: ...ACLR mea surements Useful commands for channel power measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult on page 618 TRACe n DATA on page 823 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 636 CALCulate n LIMit li ACPower ALTernate ch RESult on page 639 Remote commands exclusive to channel power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer sb RESult PHZ 641 SEN...

Page 642: ...and Relative Values ACLR Mode on page 137 10 6 4 8 Programming Examples for Channel Power Measurements The following programming examples are meant to demonstrate the most important commands to perform channel power measurements in a remote environment Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement 642 Example Configuring and Performing an ACLR Measurement In this example we will configure...

Page 643: ...t channel Also adjust the distance to the alternate channels 66 kHz POW ACH SPAC 33kHz Define a distance of 100 kHz from the center of the transmission channel to the center of the first alternate channel POW ACH SPAC ALT1 100kHz Selecting a Reference Channel Select relative display of the channel power POW ACH MODE REL Define transmission channel 1 as the reference channel POW ACH REF TXCH MAN 1 ...

Page 644: ... ACP ACH STAT ON Turn the absolute limit check for adjacent channels on CALC LIM ACP ACH ABS STAT ON Turn the absolute limit check for the first alternate channel on CALC LIM ACP ALT1 ABS STAT ON Performing the Measurement Determine the ideal ACLR measurement configuration POW ACH PRES ACP WAI Determine the ideal reference level for the measurement POW ACH PRES RLEV WAI Initiate a new measurement ...

Page 645: ... settings according to the channel bandwidth POW ACH PRES RLEV Determines the ideal reference level for the measurement Performing the Measurement INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Now turn off the carrier signal and repeat the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Re...

Page 646: ...b RESult on page 618 Remote commands exclusive to occupied bandwidth measurements SENSe POWer BWIDth 646 SENSe POWer BANDwidth 646 SENSe POWer BWIDth Percentage SENSe POWer BANDwidth Percentage This command selects the percentage of the total power that defines the occupied bandwidth Parameters Percentage Range 10 PCT to 99 9 PCT RST 99 PCT Default unit PCT Example POW BAND 95PCT Manual operation ...

Page 647: ...Return the occupied bandwidth CALC MARK FUNC POW RES OBW 10 6 7 Measuring the Spectrum Emission Mask All remote control commands specific to spectrum emission mask measurements are described here See also Chapter 10 6 2 Configuring Power Measurements on page 617 Remote commands exclusive to spectrum emission mask measurements Managing Measurement Configurations 647 Controlling the Measurement 649 ...

Page 648: ...ard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for SEM standards is C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer sem_std Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Standard String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to inclu...

Page 649: ...th to the file Manual operation See Save Standard on page 185 10 6 7 2 Controlling the Measurement The following commands control the measurement itself INITiate n ESPectrum 649 SENSe SWEep MODE 649 INITiate n ESPectrum This command initiates a Spectrum Emission Mask measurement Suffix n irrelevant SENSe SWEep MODE Mode This command selects the spurious emission and spectrum emission mask measure ...

Page 650: ... 662 Remote commands exclusive to multi SEM measurements SENSe ESPectrum sb SCENter 650 SENSe ESPectrum sb SCOunt 650 SENSe ESPectrum sb SCENter Frequency This command defines the center frequency of the selected sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Frequency Frequency within the currently defined global span see SENSe FREQuency SPAN...

Page 651: ...656 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INSert 656 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STARt 657 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STOP 657 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt 658 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt ABS 658 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt FUNCtion 659 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP 659 SENSe ESPe...

Page 652: ...ll ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters RBW Resolution bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths RST 30 0 kHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See RBW on page 175 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri BANDwidth VIDeo VBW This command defines the video bandwidth for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the video bandwidth has to be iden...

Page 653: ... Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri Selects the measurement range Manual operation See Delete Range on page 179 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri FILTer TYPE FilterType This command selects the filter type for an SEM range In case of high speed measurements the filter has to be identical for all ranges The EMI specific filter types are available if the EMI R S FPL1 K54 measurement option is installed even if EMI measu...

Page 654: ...the first SEM range and the stop frequency of the last SEM range to the span For more information see Ranges and Range Settings on page 164 Suffix sb 1 n ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Frequency Numeric value Note that the minimum frequency range of a SEM range is 20 Hz RST 12 75 MHz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Manual operation See Range Start Range...

Page 655: ...f high speed measurements the input attenuation has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Attenuation Numeric value Refer to the data sheet for the attenuation range RST 10 dB Default unit dB Manual operation See RF Attenuation on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the...

Page 656: ...um sb RANGe ri INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier for a SEM range on and off In case of high speed measurements the state of the preamplifier has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Preamp on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri INSert Mode This command inserts a new SEM ...

Page 657: ...ESPectrum RANGe LIMit ABSolute STARt 10 For a detailed example see Chapter 10 6 7 10 Example SEM Measurement on page 674 Manual operation See Abs Limit Start Stop n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li ABSolute STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a SEM range Unlike manual operation you can define an absolute limit anytime and regardless of the limit check mode Suffix ...

Page 658: ...dBc Example SENS ESP RANG LIM REL STAR 10 Manual operation See Rel Limit Start Stop n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt ABS Level This command defines an absolute limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 167 Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which ...

Page 659: ... value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt and SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative start value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARtcommand to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STARt FUN...

Page 660: ...te limit for the MAX function of the relative limit for a SEM range For more information see Relative limit line functions on page 167 Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri 1 n Selects the SEM range li 1 n Power class for which the limit is defined Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range to be used in addition to the relative limit if the MAX function is enabled see SENSe ESPectrum sb R...

Page 661: ...trum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP and SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP ABS commands to define these values OFF No function is used the relative limit line is defined by a fixed relative stop value Use the SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP command to define this value RST OFF Example SENSe ESPectrum RANGe LIMit RELative STOP FUNCtion MAX For a detailed examp...

Page 662: ... Manual operation See Limit Check n on page 177 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri POINts MINimum VALue SweepPoint Defines the minimum number of sweep points for the range Suffix sb 1 to 3 ri Selects the measurement range Parameters SweepPoint Minimum number of sweep points per range Range 1 to 32001 RST 1 Example SENSe1 ESPectrum RANGe3 POINts MIN VALue 400 Manual operation See Min Sweep Points on page ...

Page 663: ...ines the reference level for a SEM range In case of high speed measurements the reference level has to be identical for all ranges Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters RefLevel Reference level Refer to the data sheet for the reference level range RST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum sb...

Page 664: ... 3 ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example ESP RANG3 SWE TIME AUTO OFF Deactivates the sweep time auto mode for range 3 Manual operation See Sweep Time Mode on page 176 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri TRANsducer Transducer This command selects a transducer factor for a SEM range Note that the transducer must cover at least the span of the range the x axis has to ...

Page 665: ...Se ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC ALPHa 665 SENSe ESPectrum sb FILTer RRC STATe 666 SENSe ESPectrum sb RRANge 666 SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe 666 SENSe ESPectrum sb BWID Bandwidth This command defines the channel bandwidth of the reference range The bandwidth is available if the power reference is the channel power Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters Bandwidth minimum span value...

Page 666: ...b block in a Multi SEM measurement Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See RRC Filter State on page 181 SENSe ESPectrum sb RRANge This command queries the reference range Suffix sb 1 to 3 Sub block in a Multi SEM measurement Return values RefRange Number of the current reference range Range 1 to 30 Usage Query only SENSe ESPectrum sb RTYPe Type This command defines the type of the p...

Page 667: ...te n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum 671 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb LIMits Max1 Max2 Max3 This command sets or queries up to 4 power classes in one step You can only define values for the number of power classes defined by CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc COUNt on page 669 Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 3 Setting parameters Max1 Defines the value range for powe...

Page 668: ...d defines wether the power class is determined automatically or manually Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 3 Parameters Mode AUTO The power class and thus the limit line is assigned dynamically according to the currently measured channel power MANUAL One of the specified power classes is selected manually for the entire measurement The selection is made with the CALCulate n LIMit li ESPect...

Page 669: ...e and selects the limit line for P 33 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc COUNt NoPowerClasses This command sets the number of power classes to be defined This command must be executed before any new power class values can be defined using CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MAXimum and CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 3 ...

Page 670: ...heck mode for each power class Suffix n irrelevant li irrelevant sb 1 to 3 pc 1 n power class Parameters State ABSolute RELative AND OR ABSolute Evaluates only limit lines with absolute power values RELative Evaluates only limit lines with relative power values AND Evaluates limit lines with relative and absolute power values A negative result is returned if both limits fail OR Evaluates limit lin...

Page 671: ...e 199 9 dBm to 200 dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC LIM ESP PCL1 MAX 40 dBm Sets the maximum power value of the first power class to 40 dBm Manual operation See PMin PMax on page 183 CALCulate n LIMit li ESPectrum sb PCLass pc MINimum Level This command defines the lower limit of a particular power class Note The first power class always has a lower limit of 200 dBm The lower limit of a power cla...

Page 672: ...um PSEarch IMMediate 672 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch IMMediate 672 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch MARGin 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch PSHow 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch AUTO State This command turns the list evaluation on and off Suffix n Window Parameter...

Page 673: ...the peak labels in the diagram on and off Peak labels are blue squares Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC ESP PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 186 10 6 7 8 Performing an SEM Measurement The following commands are required to perform an SEM measurement SENS SWE MODE ESP see SENSe SWEep MODE on page 649 INITiate n IMMedi...

Page 674: ...to be configured and no sweep operation may be running If required a sweep stop can be ensured by INIT IMM WAI INIT CONT OFF Managing Measurement Configurations Load the 3GPP configuration stored in the file 3GPP_UL xml ESP PRES WCDMA 3GPP UL 3GPP_UL xml Defining the Reference Range Query the current reference range ESP RRAN Select the channel power as the power reference ESP RTYP CPOW Define a ch...

Page 675: ... range 2 ESP RANG2 STAR 9000000 Switch off Fast SEM mode so the ranges can be configured individually ESP HSP OFF Define a resolution bandwidth of 1 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 BAND RES 1000000 Select an RRC filter for range 2 ESP RANG2 FILT TYPE RRC Define a video bandwidth of 5 MHz for range 2 ESP RANG2 BAND VID 5000000 Define a sweep time of 1 second for range 2 ESP RANG2 SWE TIME 1 Define a refe...

Page 676: ... ESP RANG2 LIM1 REL STOP ABS 13 Check the absolute and relative limits for all ranges in power class 2 and fails if either limit is violated Since power class 2 is set to be used for the entire measurement values for Limit Check 1 are irrelevant ESP RANG LIM2 STAT OR Define an absolute limit of 10 dBm for the entire range 2 for power class 2 ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STAR 10 ESP RANG2 LIM2 ABS STOP 10 De...

Page 677: ... 10 6 8 1 Initializing the Measurement Note that with the R S FPL1000 the spurious measurement must be initialized before you can start configuring the sweep list or list evaluation INITiate n SPURious 677 INITiate n SPURious This command initiates a Spurious Emission measurement Suffix n 10 6 8 2 Configuring a Sweep List The following commands configure the sweep list for spurious emission measur...

Page 678: ... 684 SENSe LIST RANGe ri SWEep TIME AUTO 684 SENSe LIST RANGe ri TRANsducer 685 SENSe LIST RANGe ri BANDwidth RESolution RBW This command defines the resolution bandwidth for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters RBW Resolution bandwidth Refer to the data sheet for available resolution bandwidths Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 BAND RES 3KH...

Page 679: ...SENSe LIST RANGe ri COUNt This command queries the number of ranges in the sweep list Suffix ri irrelevant Return values Ranges Number of ranges in the sweep list Example LIST RANG COUN Usage Query only SENSe LIST RANGe ri DELete This command removes a range from the sweep list Note that you cannot delete the reference range a minimum of three ranges is mandatory Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurem...

Page 680: ...Hz range 1 2 515 MHz range 2 2 515 MHz range 3 Default unit Hz Example LIST RANG2 STAR 2MHZ Manual operation See Range Start Range Stop on page 205 SENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STOP Frequency This command defines the stop frequency of a spurious emission measurement range Make sure to set an appropriate span If you set a span that is smaller than the span the sweep list covers the R S FPL1000 wil...

Page 681: ...PULSe CISPR 6 dB requires EMI R S FPL1 K54 option Return value for query is always PULS MIL MIL Std 6 dB requires EMI R S FPL1 K54 option P5 5 Pole filters RST NORM The available bandwidths of the filters are specified in the data sheet Example LIST RANG2 FILT TYPE NORM Manual operation See Filter Type on page 205 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut ATTenuation Attenuation This command defines the input att...

Page 682: ... State This command turns the preamplifier for a spurious emission measurement range on and off Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example LIST RANG2 INP GAIN STAT ON Manual operation See Preamp on page 206 SENSe LIST RANGe ri INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the preamplification level for the range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Ex...

Page 683: ...ample LIST RANG2 LIM STAT ON Manual operation See Limit Check on page 207 SENSe LIST RANGe ri LIMit STOP Level This command defines an absolute limit for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters Level Absolute limit at the stop frequency of a SEM range Range 400 to 400 RST 13 Default unit dBm Example LIST RANG2 LIM STOP 200 Manual operation See A...

Page 684: ...he reference level range RST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Example LIST RANG2 RLEV 1DBM Manual operation See Reference Level on page 206 SENSe LIST RANGe ri SWEep TIME SweepTime This command defines the sweep time for a spurious emission measurement range Suffix ri 1 n Selects the measurement range Parameters SweepTime Sweep time The range depends on the ratios of the span to the RBW and the RBW to the V...

Page 685: ...ducer String containing the transducer file name Do not include a file extension or the file path The file must be located in the C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer trd directory Example LIST RANG2 TRAN MYTRANS Manual operation See Transducer on page 206 10 6 8 3 Configuring the List Evaluation The following commands configure the list evaluation Useful commands for spurious emission ...

Page 686: ...age 208 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch DETails State CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch DETails State This command configures how detailed the list in the Result Summary is Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Includes all detected peaks up to a maximum defined by CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges on page 687 OFF 0 Includes only one peak per range RST 0 Example CALC ESP PSE DET ON CALC PSE...

Page 687: ... 0 RST 0 Example CALC PSE PSH ON Marks all peaks with blue squares Manual operation See Show Peaks on page 208 CALCulate n PSEarch SUBRanges NumberPeaks CALCulate n PEAKsearch SUBRanges NumberPeaks This command defines the number of peaks included in the peak list After this number of peaks has been found the R S FPL1000 stops the peak search and continues the search in the next measurement range ...

Page 688: ...yze and retrieve measurement results for Spurious mea surements Useful commands for spurious emission measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL on page 907 TRACe n DATA on page 823 TRACe n DATA MEMory on page 824 TRACe n DATA X on page 825 10 6 8 7 Programming Example Spurious Emissions Measurement In the following example the Spurious Emissions measurement is configured by defin ...

Page 689: ...tion in range 1 off LIST RANG1 INP ATT 10 Defines a input attenuation of 10 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 FILT TYPE CFILter Selects an Channel filter for range 1 LIST RANG1 DET SAMP Selects a sample detector for range 1 LIST RANG1 POIN 601 Defines 601 sweep points for range 1 LIST RANG1 RLEV 20 Defines a reference level of 20 dBm for range 1 LIST RANG1 SWE TIME 5 Defines a manual sweep time of 5 seco...

Page 690: ...eck for limit line 1 TRAC SPUR Queries the peak list of the spurious emission measurement 10 6 9 Analyzing Statistics APD CCDF All remote control commands specific to statistical measurements are described here Activating Statistical Measurements 690 Configuring Statistical Measurements 691 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements 692 Scaling the Diagram 694 Performing a Statistical Measurem...

Page 691: ...escribed elsewhere SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 758 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel on page 766 Make sure the specified reference level is higher than the measured peak value see CALCulate n MARKer m Y on page 850 Remote commands exclusive to statistical measurements CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 691 CALCulate n STATistics NSAMples 692 CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent Probability This...

Page 692: ... 3 Using Gate Ranges for Statistical Measurements The following commands control gated statistical measurements SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t COMMent 692 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t PERiod 692 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STARt gr 693 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STATe gr 693 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t STOP gr 694 SENSe SWEep EGATe TRACe t COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the gate of a partic...

Page 693: ... following rules apply the start time may not be higher than the length of the gate the start time may not be lower than the stop time of the gate range of a lower order The reset values depend on the gate range for gate range 1 the start time is 0 ms for gate range 3 the start time is 2 ms for gate range 5 the start time is 4 ms Default unit s Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STAR1 3ms Sets the Starting po...

Page 694: ...he gate range for gate range 1 the stop time is 1 ms for gate range 3 the stop time is 3 ms for gate range 5 the stop time is 5 ms Default unit s Example SWE EGAT TRAC1 STOP1 5ms Sets the stopping point for range 1 on trace 1 at 5 ms Manual operation See Range x Start Stop on page 220 10 6 9 4 Scaling the Diagram The following commands set up the diagram for statistical measurements CALCulate n ST...

Page 695: ... power for the APD measurement and of the spacing between peak power and mean power for the CCDF measurement In addition the probability scale for the number of test points is adapted To get valid results you have to perform a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the auto range process This is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n Window Manual operation See Adjust Settings on p...

Page 696: ...ST 0 dBm Default unit dBm Example CALC STAT SCAL X RLEV 60dBm Manual operation See Ref Level on page 221 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer Magnitude This command defines the lower vertical limit of the diagram Suffix n Window Parameters Magnitude The number is a statistical value and therefore dimensionless Range 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Y Max...

Page 697: ...Tiate n IMMediate on page 616 see Chapter 10 6 1 Performing Mea surements on page 614 10 6 9 6 Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the measurement results Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 837 Remote commands exclusive to statistical results CALCulate n STATistics CCDF X t 697 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res 6...

Page 698: ...ak power to average power in dB ALL Results of all three measurements mentioned before separated by commas mean power peak power crest factor Example CALC STAT RES2 ALL Reads out the three measurement results of trace 2 Example of answer string 5 56 19 25 13 69 i e mean power 5 56 dBm peak power 19 25 dBm crest factor 13 69 dB Usage Query only 10 6 9 7 Programming Example Measuring Statistics This...

Page 699: ...FF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the sweep has finished Retrieving Results CALC STAT RES1 MEAN Returns the mean average power for the useful part of the GSM signal Determining the CCDF values CALC STAT CCDF ON Activates CCDF measurement CALC MARK2 Y PERC 95PCT Sets marker 2 to the 95 probability value INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits u...

Page 700: ... for time domain power measurements described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe Remote commands exclusive to time domain power measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AOFF 700 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion...

Page 701: ...0 RST 0 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC SUMM AVER ON Switches on the calculation of average AVER COUN 200 Sets the measurement counter to 200 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd State This command switches on or off the peak hold function for the active power measure ment in zero span in the window specified b...

Page 702: ...x n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Results on page 228 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak STATe State This command turns the evaluation to determine the positive peak time domain power on and off The R S FPL1000 performs the measurement on the trace marker 1 is positioned on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation...

Page 703: ...are required to perform a Time Domain Power measurement INITiate n IMMediate on page 616 See Chapter 10 6 1 Performing Measurements on page 614 10 6 10 3 Retrieving Measurement Results The following commands query the results for time domain measurements Measuring the Mean Power CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN AVERage RESult 703 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary MEAN PHOLd RESult 70...

Page 704: ...ry PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values MeanPower Mean power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary ...

Page 705: ...ulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PPEak PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum positive peak time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold function has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary PHOLd To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result Th...

Page 706: ... before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values RMSPower RMS power of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS PHOLd RESult This command queries the maximum RMS of the time domain power The query is only possible if the peak hold func...

Page 707: ...nd queries the average standard deviation of the time domain power The query is only possible if averaging has been activated previously using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary AVERage on page 701 To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also...

Page 708: ...e to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values StandardDeviation Standard deviation of the signal during the measurement time Usage Query only 10 6 10 4 Programming Example Time Domain Power This program...

Page 709: ...µs CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 6ms Sets the right limit line to 538 µs Performing the Measurement INIT WAI Initiates the measurement and waits until the measurement is finished Retrieving the Results CALC MARK FUNC SUMM MEAN RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM PPE RES CALC MARK FUNC SUMM RMS RES Queries the mean peak and RMS time domain power 10 6 11 Measuring the Harmonic Distortion All remote control commands spe...

Page 710: ... specific center frequency in zero span before the harmonic measurement is started Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC HARM ON Activates the harmonic distortion measurement 10 6 11 2 Configuring the Measurement The following commands control the harmonic distortion measurement Useful commands for harmonic distortion measurements described elsewhere CAL...

Page 711: ...s on page 236 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet This command initiates a measurement to determine the ideal configuration for the har monic distortion measurement The method depends on the span Frequency domain span 0 Frequency and level of the first harmonic are determined and used for the mea surement list Time domain span 0 The level of the first harmonic is determined The frequenc...

Page 712: ...t This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker Query parameters Result TOTal Return values DistortionPct DistortionDb Usage Query only CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST This command queries the position of the harmonics To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of t...

Page 713: ...ates the measurement and finishes the sweep Retrieving the Results CALC MARK FUNC HARM LIST Queries the position of the harmonics CALC MARK FUNC HARM DIST TOT Queries the total harmonic distortion 10 6 12 Measuring the Third Order Intercept Point Determining the TOI 713 Programming Example Measuring the TOI 716 10 6 12 1 Determining the TOI All remote control commands specific to TOI measurements ...

Page 714: ...dified separately afterwards with the CALCulate n DELTamarker m X command The third order intercept is calculated from the level spacing between the normal mark ers and the delta markers Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches on the measurement of the third order intercept CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI SEARchsignal ONCE This command in...

Page 715: ...alid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate n CONTinuous on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker Return values TOI Maximum third order intercept point Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept ...

Page 716: ...ARK FUNC TOI ON Switches the intercept measurement INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC TOI RES MIN Returns the minimum TOI Usage Query only 10 6 12 2 Programming Example Measuring the TOI This example demonstrates how to determine the TOI in a remote environment Configuring the measurement RST Reset the instrument CALC MARK FUNC TOI ON Activate TOI measurement Performing t...

Page 717: ...7 Remote commands exclusive to AM modulation depth measurements CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 717 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 717 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t 718 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe State This command turns the AM Modulation Depth measurement on and off To work correctly the measurement requires an AM modulated signal...

Page 718: ...on page 616 Suffix n Window m Marker t Trace Return values ModulationDepth Modulation depth in Usage Query only 10 6 13 2 Example Measuring the AM Modulation Depth This example demonstrates how to determine the AM modulation depth in a remote environment Note that without a real input signal this measurement will not return use ful results Configuring the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ ...

Page 719: ...in a remote envi ronment This measurement requires the R S FPL1 K54 option The following tasks specific to the EMI application are described here Activating EMI Measurement 719 Configuring EMI Markers 720 Configuring the EMI Final Test 721 Configuring EMI Limit Lines 722 Controlling LISN 722 Retrieving EMI Results 724 Evaluating the Results 725 Programming Example EMI Measurement 725 10 6 14 1 Act...

Page 720: ...LCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 836 Remote commands exclusive to configuring EMI markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector 720 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector 720 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector Detector CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DETector Detector This command selects the detector for a specific marker during the...

Page 721: ...ion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO 721 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 721 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement DWELl 721 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch AUTO State CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO State CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PEAKsearch...

Page 722: ...HASe 722 INPut ip LISN TYPE 723 INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe State This command turns the 150 kHz highpass filter for the ENV216 network on and off Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Example Turn on high pass filter INP LISN TYPE ENV216 INP LISN FILT HPAS ON Manual operation See 150 kHz Highpass on page 270 I...

Page 723: ...NV 216 two phases and highpass are controllable ENV432 R S ENV 432 four phases are controllable ENV4200 R S ENV 4200 four phases are controllable ESH2Z5 R S ESH2 Z5 four phases incl protective earth are controlla ble ESH3Z5 R S ESH3 Z5 two phases incl protective earth are controlla ble FOURphase R S ESH2 Z5 four phases incl protective earth are controlla ble OFF Turns off remote control of the LIS...

Page 724: ...NCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LCONdition 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LDELta 725 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement LIMit li LDELta 725 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult Result CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult Result This command queries the result of the EMI measurement at the marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Ret...

Page 725: ...e marker has been assigned to a different trace than the limit line or if no limit ine is defined for the marker position the command returns 200 Suffix n Window m Marker li 1 n Limit line Return values Amplitude Vertical distance to the limit line in dB Example CALC MARK3 FUNC FME LIM2 LDEL Queries the distance of marker 3 to the second limit line Usage Query only 10 6 14 7 Evaluating the Results...

Page 726: ...scaling DISP TRAC X SPAC LOG Configure marker demodulation for marker 1 CALC MARK FUNC DEM ON Increase the number of sweep points SWE POIN 200000 Set the unit to V CALC UNIT POW V Configuring EMI markers Activate 6 normal EMI markers CALC MARK1 ON CALC MARK2 ON CALC MARK3 ON CALC MARK4 ON CALC MARK5 ON CALC MARK6 ON Set markers 1 to 3 on trace 1 Set markers 4 to 6 on trace 2 CALC MARK1 TRAC 1 CALC...

Page 727: ...CALC MARK1 X CALC MARK1 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK2 X CALC MARK2 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK3 X CALC MARK3 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK4 X CALC MARK4 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK5 X CALC MARK5 FUNC FME RES CALC MARK6 X CALC MARK6 FUNC FME RES Query the result of the limit check for trace 1 CALC LIM1 FAIL Query the result of the limit check and the distance from the limit lines for each marker CALC MARK1 FUNC FME LIM C...

Page 728: ...ment and querying of the results in a single command line This method causes the least delay between the measurement and the result output However it requires the control computer to wait for the response from the instrument Instrument setup and querying of the result list at the end of the measurement With this method the control computer may be used for other activities while the measurement is ...

Page 729: ... FPL1000 produces a service request when all frequencies have been measured and the number of individual mea surements has been performed Note that using the command as a query initiates the measurement and returns the results if all frequencies have been measured For more information on querying the results see SENSe LIST POWer RESult Parameters Frequency Defines the frequency Each frequency corr...

Page 730: ...uency you want to measure The state of the first three parameters PeakPower RMSPower and AVG Power define the number of results for each frequency in the list Note that you have to set the trigger level after sending this command Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 Turns peak power evaluation on and off RST 1 State ON OFF 0 1 Turns RMS power evaluation on and off RST 0 State ON OFF 0 1 Turns average power...

Page 731: ...4 0 10 10 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 3 935 6 0 10 20 Channel 30 kHz 100 kHz 440 µs 0 Measurement with synchronization via service request ESE 1 SRE 32 Configures the status reporting system to produce a service request LIST POW SET ON ON OFF EXT POS 10us 434us Turns on the list evaluation configures the global list evaluation settings and evaluates the peak and RMS power LIST POW 935 2MHZ 0 1...

Page 732: ...the TTL level In case of a video signal you can define any threshold The figure below shows the relations between the available trigger settings The measurement is always on trace 1 either with the peak detector to determine the peak power or the RMS detector to determine the RMS power Overall you can config ure the measurement independent of the instrument setup with the commands listed below onl...

Page 733: ...d OfPulses This command configures power measurements on pulses in the time domain To evaluate the pulse power the R S FPL1000 uses the data captured during a previ ous measurement The data recorded during the set measurement time is combined to a measured value for each pulse according to the detector specified and the indicated number of results is output as a list To get a valid result you have...

Page 734: ...lsePower List of pulse powers The number of values depends on the number of pulses you have been measuring The unit is dBm Usage Query only SENSe MPOWer SEQuence Frequency RBW MeasTime TriggerSource TriggerLevel TriggerOffset Detector NoPulses This command configures and initiates the pulse power measurement The R S FPL1000 caches all measurement parameters that you can set with this command If yo...

Page 735: ...PCT TriggerOffset Defines the trigger delay Range 0 s to 30 s RST 0 s Default unit s Detector Selects the detector and therefore the way the measurement is evaluated MEAN Calculates the RMS pulse power PEAK Calculates the peak pulse power OfPulses Defines the number of pulses included in the measurement Range 1 to 32001 Return values PowerLevel Pulse power level The result is a list of floating po...

Page 736: ... 935 2MHZ 1MHZ 434us VID 50 5us MEAN 20 Configures initiates and queries the results of the measurement Result example 105 225059509 105 656074524 105 423065186 104 374649048 103 059822083 101 29511261 99 96534729 99 7452468872 99 6610794067 100 327224731 100 96686554 101 450386047 102 150642395 103 240142822 105 95476532 110 583129883 115 7760849 126 279388428 124 620399475 116 97366333 10 6 17 P...

Page 737: ... EATT STAT ON Switches on the electronic attenuator INP EATT 5dB Sets the electronic attenuation to 5 dB INP ATT 0dB Sets the mechanical attenuation to 0 dB makes a total of 5 dB attenuation otherwise INP ATT 5 dB Sets the mechanical attenuation to 40 dB and couples the reference level to the attenuation instead of vice versa Configuring the Amplitude and Scaling DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Shifts...

Page 738: ...OS SENS DET2 RMS SENS DET3 POS Configures traces 1 and 3 to use the positive peak detector trace 2 uses the RMS detector TRAC COPY TRACE4 TRACE1 Copies trace 1 to a new trace 4 which will then be averaged SENS AVER STAT4 ON SENS AVER COUN 10 SENS AVER TYPE LIN Configures trace 4 to be averaged linearly over 10 sweeps CALC MATH STAT ON CALC MATH MODE LIN CALC MATH TRACE1 TRACE2 CALC MATH POS 75 Cal...

Page 739: ...ow in the currently selected channel setup See INSTrument SELect on page 609 LAYout ADD WINDow 739 LAYout CATalog WINDow 740 LAYout IDENtify WINDow 741 LAYout MOVE WINDow 741 LAYout REMove WINDow 742 LAYout REPLace WINDow 742 LAYout SPLitter 742 LAYout WINDow n ADD 744 LAYout WINDow n IDENtify 744 LAYout WINDow n REMove 745 LAYout WINDow n REPLace 745 LAYout ADD WINDow WindowName Direction WindowT...

Page 740: ...See Marker Table on page 118 See Marker Peak List on page 118 See Result Summary on page 119 See Spectrogram on page 119 Table 10 3 WindowType parameter values for the Spectrum application Parameter value Window type DIAGram Diagram MTABle Marker table PEAKlist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary SGRam Spectrogram LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active win...

Page 741: ...VE WINDow WindowName WindowName Direction Setting parameters WindowName String containing the name of an existing window that is to be moved By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel setup use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query WindowName String containing the name of an existing window the selected window is p...

Page 742: ... use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Setting parameters WindowName String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel setup use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query WindowType Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 739 for...

Page 743: ...menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See Figure 10 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 t...

Page 744: ... To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow n REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Suffix n Window Query parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow WindowType Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 739 for a list of availa ble window types Return values NewWindowName ...

Page 745: ...and Suffix n Window Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAYout WINDow n REPLace WindowType This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix n in the active channel setup The effect of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow n ADD command Suffix n Window Setting p...

Page 746: ...dd a Spectrogram window beneath the Frequency Sweep window LAY ADD 1 BEL SGR Result window number 2 Add a Marker Table window to the right of the Frequency Sweep window LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB Result window number 3 Add a Marker Peak List window to the right of the Spectrogram window LAY WIND2 ADD RIGH PEAK Result window number 4 Changing the size of individual windows Move the splitter between the Fr...

Page 747: ...ogram DISP WIND2 SIZE LARG Restore multiple window display DISP WIND2 SIZE SMAL 10 7 2 2 Example 2 Replacing and Removing Windows Starting from the display configured in Example 1 Adding and Arranging Windows we will remove and replace result displays to obtain the following configuration 1 Frequency Sweep 4 Marker Table Preparing the configuration from example 1 RST LAY ADD 1 BEL SGR LAY ADD 1 RI...

Page 748: ...he Frequency and Span 748 Configuring Bandwidth and Sweep Settings 758 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling 765 Configuring Triggered and Gated Measurements 771 Configuring the Data Input and Output 778 Zooming into the Display 802 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data 805 Working with Markers 831 Configuring Display Lines 891 Defining Limit Checks 894 10 8 1 Defining ...

Page 749: ...ENTer This command matches the center frequency to the frequency of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC CENT Sets the center frequency to the frequency of marker 2 Manual operation See Center Frequency Marker Frequency on page 365 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CSTep This...

Page 750: ... frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See PS Frequency on page 299 See Center Frequency on page 305 See Frequency on page 339 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP StepSize This command defines the center frequency step size You ...

Page 751: ...ency CENTer STEP LINK CouplingType This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters CouplingType SPAN RBW OFF SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain OFF Decouples the step size RST ...

Page 752: ...hift numerically by the application See also Frequency Offset on page 307 Parameters Offset Range 1 THz to 1 THz RST 0 Hz Default unit HZ Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 307 SENSe FREQuency SPAN Span This command defines the frequency span If you set a span of 0 Hz in the Spectrum application the R S FPL1000 starts a mea surement in the time domain Parameters S...

Page 753: ...an to fmax RST fmax Default unit HZ Example FREQ STOP 2000 MHz Manual operation See Frequency Sweep on page 97 See Start Stop on page 306 10 8 1 2 Adjusting Settings Automatically The commands required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment are described here SENSe ADJust ALL 753 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation 754 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE 754 SENSe ADJust...

Page 754: ...ment length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 348 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R S FPL1000 performs a measure ment on the current input data This command selects the way the R S FPL1000 determines the length of the measurem...

Page 755: ...Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 756 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference le...

Page 756: ...hat is too small Example ADJ LEV Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 315 10 8 1 3 Configuring Signal Tracking When signal tracking is activated the maximum signal is determined after each fre quency sweep and the center frequency is set to the frequency of this signal Thus with drifting signals the center frequency follows the signal For more details s...

Page 757: ... command defines the bandwidth around the center frequency that is included in the signal tracking process Note that you have to turn on signal tracking before you can use the command Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters Bandwidth Range 10 Hz to Max span RST span 10 on activating the function Default unit Hz Manual operation See Signal Tracking on page 308 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion STRa...

Page 758: ...g the Sweep 761 10 8 2 1 Configuring the Bandwidth and Filter SENSe BWIDth RESolution 758 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution 758 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO 759 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO 759 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio 759 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio 759 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 759 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 759 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 760 SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo 760 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AU...

Page 759: ...olution bandwidth to the span Manual operation See RBW on page 267 See Default Coupling on page 329 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio Ratio SENSe BANDwidth RESolution RATio Ratio This command defines the ratio between the resolution bandwidth Hz and the span Hz Note that the ratio defined with this remote command RBW span is reciprocal to that of the coupling ratio span RBW Parameters Ratio Range 0 00...

Page 760: ... K54 option RST NORMal Example BAND TYPE NORM Example See Chapter 10 6 17 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 736 Manual operation See Filter Type on page 266 See Res BW CISPR on page 269 See Res BW MIL on page 269 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo Bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo Bandwidth This command defines the video bandwidth The command decouples the video bandwidth from the resol...

Page 761: ... 328 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo TYPE Mode SENSe BANDwidth VIDeo TYPE Mode This command enables or disables the logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter in the signal path Parameters Mode LINear The logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter is bypassed to process linear detector samples LOGarithmic The logarithmic amplifier in front of the video filter is enabled to process logarithmic d...

Page 762: ...rs SweepCount When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R S FPL1000 per forms one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation S...

Page 763: ...is steps are required to cover the entire measurement span The span which is covered by one FFT analysis step is called subspan The sub span cannot be defined directly but it can be optimized according to measurement requirements Table 10 4 Optimization parameters in FFT mode Optimization mode Description DYNamic Optimizes the dynamic range by using the narrowest possible subspan depending on the ...

Page 764: ... of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Note that the number of sweep points is limited to 10001 when measuring spurious emissions Suffix n Parameters SweepPoints Range 101 to 100001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 329 SENSe SWEep TIME Time This command defines the sweep time It automatically decouples the time from any other settings In the Spectrum appli...

Page 765: ... TYPE USED This command queries the sweep type if you have turned on automatic selection of the sweep type Return values Type SWE Normal sweep FFT FFT mode 10 8 3 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment Amplitude Settings 765 Configuring the Attenuation 767 Configuring a Pream...

Page 766: ... reference level to the level of marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Level Marker Level on page 366 CALCulate n UNIT POWer Unit UNIT n POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows with absolute values Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere Units based on 1 MHz require installed R S FPL...

Page 767: ... TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 221 See Shifting the Display Offset on page 314 10 8 3 2 Configuring the Attenuation INPut ip ATTenuation 767 INPut ip EATT AUTO 768 INPut ip ATTenuation AUTO 768 INPut ip ATTenuation Attenuation This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the r...

Page 768: ...l for opti mal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly For the R S FPL1000 these commands are identical Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 315 10 8 3 3 Configuring a Preamplifier INPut ip GAIN STATe 768 INPut ip GAIN STATe...

Page 769: ...the display range of the y axis for all traces Note that the command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SPACing Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Range Range 1 dB to 200 dB RST 100 dB Default unit HZ Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Manual operation See Range on page 317 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic sca...

Page 770: ...000 adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the optional tracking generator the command defines the posi tion of the reference line Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Position 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 percent cor responds to the upper display border RST frequency display 90 PCT time display 50 PCT AF spectrum display K7 100 PCT Default unit...

Page 771: ...ation on page 334 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned Configuring the Triggering Conditions 771 Configuring Gated Measurements 776 10 8 4 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement TRIGger SEQ...

Page 772: ...nges to the gate delay will affect the trigger offset as well Parameters Offset For measurements in the frequency domain the range is 0 s to 30 s For measurements in the time domain the range is the negative sweep time to 30 s RST 0 s Default unit S Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 341 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time ...

Page 773: ...ence LEVel EXTernal port TriggerLevel This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix port Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIG IN connector on rear panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIG AUX connector on rear panel Parameters TriggerLevel For the R S FPL1000 the external trigger level is always 1 4 V It cannot be changed RST 1 4 V Manual operation See...

Page 774: ...ggerLevel Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Default unit DBM Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 341 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe Type For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters Type POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level r...

Page 775: ...TIME Time interval VIDeo Video mode is available in the time domain and only in the Spectrum application RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Trigger Source on page 339 See Free Run on page 339 See External Trigger 1 on page 340 See Video on page 340 See IF Power on page 340 See Time on page 340 TRIGger SEQuence...

Page 776: ... Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example SWE EGAT ON Switches on the gate mode SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Switches on the edge triggered mode SWE EGAT HOLD 100US Sets the gate delay to 100 µs SWE EGAT LEN 500US Sets the gate opening time to 500 µs INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Manual operation See Gated Trigger on page 218 See Gated Trigger on page 344 SENSe SWEep E...

Page 777: ...an external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Parameters Polarity POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS Manual operation See Slope on page 342 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce Source This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as ...

Page 778: ...ep FFT sweep zero span and I Q mode mea surements EDGE The trigger event for the gate to open is the detection of the sig nal edge After the gate signal has been detected the gate remains open until the gate length is over RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Manual operation See Gate Mode on page 345 10 8 5 Configuring the Data Input and Output The following commands are required to configure data...

Page 779: ...ndition has been eliminated first For details on the protection mechanism see RF Input Protection on page 277 Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Example INP ATT PROT RES INPut ip FILTer SAW State Determines which IF path the R S FPL1000 hardware uses Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters State AUTO OFF AUTO The R S FPL1000 determines which IF path to use automati cally depending on the used analysis bandwidth...

Page 780: ...IMP 75 Manual operation See Impedance on page 277 See Unit on page 314 INPut ip SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R S FPL1000 If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Suffix ip 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector RST RF Manual operation ...

Page 781: ... 5 and 7 are active 10 8 5 2 Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors These commands require the use of a Rohde Schwarz power sensor For a list of supported sensors see the data sheet The Sensor connector is provided by the Additional Interfaces option R S FPL1 B5 Additionally the power sensor measurement requires the option R S FPL1 K9 Configuring ...

Page 782: ...berSensors Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 281 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine Placeholder Type Interface SerialNo This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the s...

Page 783: ... DCYCle STATe 785 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 785 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 786 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 786 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 787 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 787 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 787 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe 788 SENSe PMETer p SOFFset 788 SENSe PMETer p STATe 788 SENSe PMETer p UPDate STATe 789 UNIT n PMETer p POWer 789 UNIT n PMETer p POWer RATio 789 CALibrati...

Page 784: ...Nitude AUTO ONCE This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix n Window p Power sensor index Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref on page 282 CALCulate n...

Page 785: ...or index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe State This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 283 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue Percentage This command defines the duty cycle for the correction o...

Page 786: ...r sensor in use RST 50 MHz Default unit HZ Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 281 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK Coupling This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters Coupling CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKe...

Page 787: ...r measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters NumberReadings An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PM...

Page 788: ...n on Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Level Offset on page 282 SENSe PMETer p SOFFset SensorOffset Takes the specified offset into account for the measured power Only available if SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe is disabled Suffix p Power sensor index Parameters SensorOffset Default unit DB Example PMET2 TRIG SOFF 0 001 Manual ope...

Page 789: ... 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 280 UNIT n PMETer p POWer Unit This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements Suffix n irrelevant p Power sensor index Parameters Unit DBM WATT W DB PCT RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW D...

Page 790: ...dependant CW Source Commands 790 Tracking Generator Commands 792 Power Sweep Commands 795 Programming Example for a Tracking Generator 797 Independant CW Source Commands The following commands are required to configure an internal generator as an inde pendant CW source OUTPut up STATe 790 SOURce si INTernal FREQuency 791 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 791 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate...

Page 791: ...evant Parameters Amplitude Range 60 dBm to 10 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 20 dBm Default unit DBM Example SOUR POW 30dBm Manual operation See Level on page 293 SOURce si POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Su...

Page 792: ...CORRection COLLect ACQuire 793 SENSe CORRection METHod 794 SENSe CORRection RECall 794 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerate 795 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue 795 SOURce si FREQuency COUPling STATe State Enables or disables the usage of the internal generator as a tracking generator The tracking generator is only available for frequency sweeps in the Spectrum application Suffi...

Page 793: ...e CORRection COLLect ACQuire MeasType This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference mea surement is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 794 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of...

Page 794: ...is command is only available if the Tracking Generator is active see OUTPut up STATe on page 790 Parameters Type REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 296 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 296 See Calibrate...

Page 795: ...SUBWindow w TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Suffix n Window w subwindow t irrelevant Parameters Value Default unit DB Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz Manual operation See Reference Val...

Page 796: ...el Required for power sweep RST FIXed Example SOUR POW MODE SWE SOUR POW STAR 50 SOUR POW STOP 10 Manual operation See Power Sweep on page 98 See Usage on page 293 SOURce si POWer STARt StartLevel Defines the start power level of the internal generator signal for power sweeps This value must be lower than the stop level see SOURce si POWer STOP on page 797 Suffix si irrelevant Parameters StartLeve...

Page 797: ...ork with a tracking generator in a remote environment It requires the Tracking Generator option R S FPL1 B9 to be installed on the R S FPL1000 Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Configuring the use of the internal generator OUTP ON SOUR FREQ COUP ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR POW 10DBM Define a frequen...

Page 798: ...g the Outputs The following commands are required to provide output from the R S FPL1000 Output functions require the option R S FPL1 B5 to be installed on the R S FPL1000 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce 798 OUTPut up IF SOURce 799 OUTPut up IF IFFRequency 799 OUTPut up UPORt STATe 799 OUTPut up UPORt VALue 800 OUTPut UPORt WTRigger POLarity 800 SYSTem SPEaker STATe 801 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE 801 SYSTem S...

Page 799: ...uired to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO output connector Manual operation See Data Output on page 302 OUTPut up IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output of the R S FPL1000 The IF fre quency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domai...

Page 800: ...s written to with the given binary pattern If the user port is programmed to input instead of output see INPut ip UPORt STATe on page 780 the output value is temporarily stored Suffix up irrelevant Parameters Value bit values in hexadecimal format TTL type voltage levels max 5V Range B00000000 to B00111111 Example OUTP UPOR B00100100 Sets pins 5 and 7 to 5 V OUTPut UPORt WTRigger POLarity State De...

Page 801: ...ters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example SYST SPE ON SYST SPE VOL 0 5 Sets the loudspeaker to half the full volume Manual operation See Data Output on page 302 See Loudspeaker on page 382 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE Temporarily disables the audio output via the built in loudspeakers Example SYST SPE MUTE Manual operation See Data Output on page 302 SYSTem...

Page 802: ...ZOOM STATe 803 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM AREA x1 y1 x2 y2 This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications Parameters x1 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram tha...

Page 803: ...the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 445 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Suffix n Window w subwindow Not supported by all applications Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the func...

Page 804: ...of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT y1 Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Defau...

Page 805: ...oom windows move up one position Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Manual operation See Multi Zoom on page 446 See Restore Original Display on page 447 10 8 7 Configuring the Trace Display and Retrieving Trace Data The commands required to work with traces are described here Commands required to export traces and other result data are describ...

Page 806: ... SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO 811 TRACe n COPY 811 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode If necessary the selected trace is also activa ted In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode Su...

Page 807: ...ace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 399 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like ...

Page 808: ...age 399 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 403 DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing APERture Aperture This command defines the degree aperture of the trace smoothing if DISPlay WINDow n SUBWindow w TRACe t SMOothing STATe TRUE Suffix n Window w subwindow t Trace Parameters Aperture Range 1 to 50 RST 2 Default unit PCT Example DISP3 TRAC2 SMO APER 5 Defines an aperture o...

Page 809: ... to average traces In case of continuous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Suffix n irrelevant Parameters AverageCount If you set an average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode...

Page 810: ...rage Mode on page 401 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis For details see Mapping Samples to sweep Points with the Trace Detector on page 390 For EMI measurements the trace detector is used for the initial peak search only not for the final test The detector for the final test is configured using CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FMEasur...

Page 811: ...on AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Suffix n Window t Trace Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 400 TRACe n COPY TraceNumber TraceNumber This command copies data from one trace to another Suffix n Window Parameters TraceNumber TRACE1 TR...

Page 812: ...e channel setup For commands to set markers in spectrograms see Chapter 10 8 8 6 Marker Search Spectrograms on page 851 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement 812 Configuring the Color Map 818 Configuring a Spectrogram Measurement CALCulate n SGRam CLEar IMMediate 813 CALCulate n SPECtrogram CLEar IMMediate 813 CALCulate n SGRam CONTinuous 813 CALCulate n SPECtrogram CONTinuous 813 CALCulate n SGRa...

Page 813: ...is setting applies to all spectrograms in the channel setup Suffix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts the sweep and waits for the end of the sweep CALC SGR CONT ON Repeats the single sweep measurement without deleting the results of the last measurement Manual operation S...

Page 814: ... running or after a single sweep has ended Suffix n Window Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Default unit S Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example INIT CONT OFF Stop the conti...

Page 815: ...sult displays that support spectrograms Suffix n Window Parameters State ON Spectrogram and trace diagram share a window OFF Only the trace diagram is displayed the spectrogram is not RST OFF Example CALC4 SPEC LAY FULL Shows the spectrogram in window 4 The corresponding trace diagram is hidden Manual operation See State on page 414 CALCulate n SGRam STATe State CALCulate n SPECtrogram STATe State...

Page 816: ...e Spectrogram is based on Suffix n Window Parameters Trace TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 How many traces are available depends on the selected result display Example CALC2 SPEC TRAC TRACE3 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp DATA Frames CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp DATA Frames This command queries the starting time of the frames The return values consist of four values for each frame If the Spe...

Page 817: ...rved for future uses Example CALC SGR TST ON Activates the time stamp CALC SGR TST DATA ALL Returns the starting times of all frames sorted in a descending order Usage Query only Manual operation See Time Stamp on page 415 CALCulate n SGRam TSTamp STATe State CALCulate n SPECtrogram TSTamp STATe State This command activates and deactivates the time stamp If the time stamp is active some commands d...

Page 818: ... 819 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor DEFault DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault This command restores the original color map Suffix n Window Manual operation See Set to Default on page 418 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor LOWer Percentage DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer Percentage This command defines the starting point of the color map Suffix n Window Parameters Percentage Statistical f...

Page 819: ...nual operation See Start Stop on page 417 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe ColorScheme DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe ColorScheme This command selects the color scheme Parameters ColorScheme HOT Uses a color range from blue to red Blue colors indicate low lev els red colors indicate high ones COLD Uses a color range from red to blue Red colors indicate low lev els blue colors indicate ...

Page 820: ...s on Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Expression TRACE1 TRACE2 Subtracts trace 2 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE4 Subtracts trace 4 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE5 Subtracts trace 5 from trace 1 TRACE1 TRACE6 Subtracts trace 6 from trace 1 Example CALC MATH STAT ON Turns trace mathematics on CALC MATH EXPR DEF TRACE1 TRACE3 Subtracts trace 3 from trace 1 Ma...

Page 821: ...era tion Suffix n Window t irrelevant Parameters Position Vertical position of the trace in of the height of the diagram area 100 PCT corresponds to the upper diagram border Range 100 to 200 RST 50 Default unit PCT Example CALC MATH POS 100 Moves the trace to the top of the diagram area Manual operation See Trace Math Position on page 423 CALCulate n MATH t STATe State This command turns the trace...

Page 822: ...d selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R S FPL1000 to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R S FPL1000 The R S FPL1000 automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format For details on data formats see Chapter 10 8 7 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page ...

Page 823: ...ontains the data to transfer Query parameters ResultType Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace For details see Table 10 6 LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spurious Emis sion and Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For SEM measurements one peak per range is returned For details see Table 10 7 SPURious Retur...

Page 824: ...nel power in dBc PowerDelta distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check LimitCheck state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL Unused1 Unused2 reserved 0 0 Table 10 8 Return values for SPECtrogram parameter For every frame in the spectrogram the command returns the power levels that have been measured one for each sweep point The number of frames depends...

Page 825: ...RACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Trace number TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Return values X Values Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only 10 8 7 5 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA on p...

Page 826: ...rt FORMat FileFormat Determines the format of the ASCII file to be imported or exported Depending on the external program in which the data file was created or will be evaluated a comma sep arated list CSV or a plain data format DAT file may be required Parameters FileFormat CSV DAT RST DAT Example FORM DEXP FORM CSV Manual operation See File Type on page 454 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This c...

Page 827: ...defined as the x value at the center of the bin bin 2 STARtstop Default The x value of the first sweep point corresponds to the starting point of the full measurement span The x value of the last sweep point corresponds to the end point of the full mea surement span All other sweep points are divided evenly between the first and last points Example FORM DEXP XDIS BINC Manual operation See X Value ...

Page 828: ...nd name of the import file MMEMory STORe n TRACe Trace FileName This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file For details on the file format see Chapter 6 13 6 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 457 Suffix n Window Parameters Trace Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in t...

Page 829: ...rements The display is not cleared when a new measurement is started CALC SGR FRAM COUN 100 Sets the number of frames to be recorded per sweep to 100 CALC SGR HDEP 1000 Sets the number of frames to be stored to 1000 10 sweeps CALC SGR TST ON Activates a time stamp for each frame Configuring the Color Map DISP WIND SGR COL GRAY Defines a gray scaled coloring low values light gray high values dark g...

Page 830: ...r 1 to the minimum level in this frame CALC DELT3 SGR XY MAX Sets deltamarker 3 to the maximum level in the entire spectrogram By default its value is the difference to marker 1 We will change it to refer to marker 2 CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Deltamarker 3 now refers to marker 2 both are positioned on the maximum of the spectrogram Thus D3 0 We will move deltamarker 3 to the next peak level for the same f...

Page 831: ...n all windows Thus the suffix n for the window is generally irrelevant Setting Up Individual Markers 831 General Marker Settings 837 Configuring and Performing a Marker Search 839 Positioning the Marker 843 Retrieving Marker Results 849 Marker Search Spectrograms 851 Fixed Reference Marker Settings 860 Marker Peak Lists 862 Noise Measurement Marker 866 Phase Noise Measurement Marker 867 Band Power...

Page 832: ... value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Tip to link any marker to a different marker than marker 1 use the CALCulate n DELTamarker ms LINK TO MARKer md or CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md commands Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual ope...

Page 833: ...abso lute value or relative to a reference marker Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 835 Suffix n Window m irrelevant Parameters Mode ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute d...

Page 834: ... Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 263 See Marker Type on page 263 See Select Marker on page 265 CALCulate n DELTamarker m TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must hav...

Page 835: ...e The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Default unit HZ Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 244 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 248 See Marker Position X value on page 263 CALCulate n MARKer m AOFF This command turns off all markers Suffix n Window m Marker E...

Page 836: ... it is turned into a normal marker Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 263 See Marker Type on page 263 See Select Marker on page 265 CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that t...

Page 837: ...s on the current x axis range Default unit Hz Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 118 See Marker Peak List on page 118 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 244 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 248 See Marker Position X value on page 263 10 8 8 2 General Marker Settings The following commands control general ...

Page 838: ...ker information in the diagrams RST 1 Example DISP MINF OFF Hides the marker information Manual operation See Marker Info on page 356 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe StepSize This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows The step size defines the distance the marker moves when you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Suffix n ...

Page 839: ...Reshold STATe 842 CALCulate n MARKer m LOEXclude State This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off for all markers in all windows Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON Manual operation See Exclude LO on page 359 CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak...

Page 840: ...s in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation Manual operation See Search Limits Left Right on page 157 See Deactivating All Search Limits on ...

Page 841: ...for all markers in all windows If you perform a measurement in the time domain this command limits the range of the trace to be analyzed Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters Limit The value range depends on the frequency range or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements RST right diagram border Default unit HZ Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON...

Page 842: ...markers in all windows Note that you must enable the use of the threshold using CALCulate n THReshold STATe on page 842 Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Level Numeric value The value range and unit are variable RST 120 dBm Default unit DBM Example CALC THR STAT ON Example CALC THR 82DBM Enables the search threshold and sets the threshold value to 82 dBm Manual operation See Search Threshold on page ...

Page 843: ...4 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK 844 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt 844 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum AUTO 845 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT 845 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT 845 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK 846 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt 846 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum AUTO State This command turns an automatic marker peak search for a trace maximum on and off The R S ...

Page 844: ...al marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 365 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same If the marker is not yet active the command firs...

Page 845: ...eration See Auto Max Peak Search Auto Min Peak Search on page 360 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same...

Page 846: ...alue The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 365 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta marker...

Page 847: ...izontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n 1 n Window m 1 n Marker Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 365 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the maximum level in the currently selected frame Th...

Page 848: ...x n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 365 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value In the spectrogram the command moves a marker horizontally to the minimum level in the currently selected frame The vertical marker position remains the same Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on ...

Page 849: ...commands CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion CENTer on page 749 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence on page 766 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere CALCulate n DELTamarker m X on page 835 CALCulate n MARKer m X on page 837 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 863 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks X on page 865 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks Y on page 866...

Page 850: ...ce marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 on page 244 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 on page 248 CALCulate n DELTamarker m Y Queries the result at the position of the specified delta marker Suffix n 1 n m 1 n Return values Result Resu...

Page 851: ...ALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 844 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum LEFT on page 845 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum NEXT on page 845 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 846 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHt on page 846 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam FRAMe 852 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe 852 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SARea 852 CAL...

Page 852: ...ame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Default unit S Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets seco...

Page 853: ...RKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 362 CALCul...

Page 854: ...trogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Suffix n Window m Marker CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y M...

Page 855: ...cludes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 362 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change...

Page 856: ...imum ABOVe 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT 858 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK 859 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK 859 C...

Page 857: ... CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SARea SearchArea CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea SearchArea This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the channel setup Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters SearchArea VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the...

Page 858: ...ation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 362 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Mar...

Page 859: ...ECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Suffix n Window m Marker Manual operation See Search Mode for Next Peak in Y Direction on page 362 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCul...

Page 860: ...osition of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Suffix n Window m Marker 10 8 8 7 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 860 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCt...

Page 861: ...ce to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 357 See Defining Reference Point on page 374 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y RefPointLevel This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters RefPoint Numeric value that defines ...

Page 862: ...applied to all active delta markers Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Ma...

Page 863: ...ns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Display Marker Numbers on page 386 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number ...

Page 864: ...to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE MaxNoPeaks This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R S FPL1000 looks for during a peak search Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters MaxNoPeaks Maximum number of peaks to be determined Range 1 to 500 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST...

Page 865: ...d off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 385 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCula...

Page 866: ...Se AOFF 866 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe RESult 866 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe STATe 867 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe AOFF Removes all noise markers in the specified window Suffix n Window m irrelevant Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS AOFF CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NOISe RESult This command queries the result of the noise measurement To get a valid result you have to perform ...

Page 867: ...er position on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK FUNC NOIS ON Switches on the noise measurement Manual operation See Noise Measurement State on page 371 See Switching All Noise Measurement Off on page 371 10 8 8 10 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise ...

Page 868: ...F 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement Manual operation See Defining Reference Point on page 374 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement If necessary the command activates the measureme...

Page 869: ...Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta mark ers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 373 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off ...

Page 870: ...arker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement for the marker 2 10 8 8 11 Band Power Marker The following commands control the marker for band power measurements Using Markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer AOFF 870 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer MODE 871 CALCulate n ...

Page 871: ... UNIT POWer setting DENSity Result is displayed as a density in dBm Hz RST POWer Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Configures marker 4 to show the measurement results in dBm Hz Manual operation See Power Mode on page 380 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Suffix n Window m Marker Return values Power Signal power over the ...

Page 872: ...ements on and off Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK4 FUNC BPOW STAT ON Activates or turns marker 4 into a band power marker Manual operation See Band Power Measurement State on page 379 See Switching All Band Power Measurements Off on page 380 Using Delta Markers CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BP...

Page 873: ...ower Delta2 in dB absolute band power Delta2 in dBm absolute band power of reference marker in dBm For details see Relative band power markers on page 378 RST POWer Manual operation See Power Mode on page 380 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion BPOWer RESult This command queries the results of the band power measurement Suffix n Window m Marker Return values Power Signal power over the delta marker...

Page 874: ...n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown 874 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency 875 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor 875 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESult 876 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown STATe 876 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME 877 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown Distance This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference...

Page 875: ...y 1 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz frequency 2 absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer ence marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100...

Page 876: ...ween the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See n...

Page 877: ...f the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Value on page 376 10 8 8 13 Signal Count Marker The foll...

Page 878: ...ALC MARK ON Switches on marker 1 CALC MARK COUN ON Switches on the frequency counter for marker 1 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK COUN FREQ Outputs the measured value Manual operation See Signal Count Marker State on page 368 CALCulate n MARKer m COUNt FREQuency This command queries the frequency at the marker position To get a valid result you have to perform a complete me...

Page 879: ...e CALC MARK COUN RES 1kHz Sets the resolution of the frequency counter to 1 kHz Manual operation See Resolution on page 368 10 8 8 14 Marker Demodulation The following commands control the demodulation of AM and FM signals at the marker position This feature requires the optional additional interfaces R S FPL1 B5 Useful commands for marker demodulation described elsewhere SYSTem SPEaker STATe on p...

Page 880: ...nuous demodulation Manual operation See Continuous Demodulation on page 382 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DEModulation HOLDoff Duration This command defines for how long the the signal at the marker position is demodula ted In the time domain continuous demodulation is always on Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters Duration Range 10 ms to 1000 s RST Marker demodulation OFF Default unit S Example CA...

Page 881: ...on and off when the measurement rea ches a marker position Suffix n Window m Marker Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC MARK3 FUNC DEM ON Switches on the demodulation for marker 3 Manual operation See Marker Demodulation State on page 381 SENSe DEMod SQUelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the threshold for selective demodulat...

Page 882: ...mple Configuring a Spectrogram on page 828 Example Basic Markers 882 Example Marker Search in Spectrograms 884 Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Examples 885 Example Using a Fixed Reference Marker 885 Example Obtaining a Marker Peak List 886 Example Measuring Noise Density 886 Example Measuring Phase Noise 887 Example Measuring the Power in a Channel Using Band Power Markers 88...

Page 883: ...ivates marker 3 and sets it to the freq 150 MHz on trace 1 CALC MARK4 TRAC 4 Activates marker 4 and sets it to the peak of trace 4 CALC MARK1 MAX AUTO ON Moves M1 to the current peak of trace 1 after each sweep CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Moves M2 to the next lower peak of trace 2 CALC DELT5 ON CALC DELT5 LINK ON Activates delta marker 5 and links it to marker 1 If M1 moves so does D5 CALC DELT5 MREF 4 Ch...

Page 884: ...by presetting the instrument Analyzing the results using markers Set marker1 on the peak power in the most recent spectrum and query its position CALC2 SPEC FRAM SEL 0 CALC2 MARK1 ON CALC2 MARK1 X CALC2 MARK1 Y Set marker2 on the peak power in frame at 324ms and query its position CALC2 MARK2 ON CALC2 MARK2 SGR FRAM 324ms CALC2 MARK2 X CALC2 MARK2 Y Set marker3 on peak power level in the entire sp...

Page 885: ...its for it to end Example Using a Fixed Reference Marker This example demonstrates how to configure and use reference markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Basic Frequency Sweep Measurement for Marker Function Exam ples on page 885 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Configuring the...

Page 886: ...X SLIM ON CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 50MHz CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 150MHz CALC MARK PEXC 10DB CALC THR 100DBM CALC THR STAT ON CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 5 CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT X CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB ON Retrieving results CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN CALC MARK FUNC FPE X CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y Exporting the peak list MMEM STOR PEAK PeakList Example Measuring Noise Density T...

Page 887: ... CALC DELT2 ON CALC DELT2 X 500kHz CALC DELT3 ON CALC DELT3 X 1MHz CALC DELT4 ON CALC DELT4 X 1 5MHz Activates the phase noise measurement function for offsets 100kHz 500kHz 1MHz 1 5MHz BAND VID Queries the used VBW 0 1 RBW Querying the phase noise results CALC DELT1 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT2 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT3 FUNC PNO RES CALC DELT4 FUNC PNO RES Queries the difference in level between the pea...

Page 888: ...and power measurement for the band around deltamarker 3 CALC DELT3 FUNC BPOW SPAN 30MHz Sets the bandwidth to be measured to 30 MHz CALC DELT3 FUNC BPOW MODE DENS Sets the result to be a density power per Hz bandwidth Retrieving Results CALC MARK1 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwidth around marker 1 CALC DELT2 FUNC BPOW RES Returns the power sum for the specified bandwid...

Page 889: ...emodulate markers and provide audio output in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic fre quency sweep described in Chapter 10 6 17 Programming Example Performing a Basic Frequency Sweep on page 736 has been performed and thus does not begin by presetting the instrument Audio output is provided for 5s each time the signal reaches its initial maximum how ever ...

Page 890: ...ides continuous audio output Retrieving Results Results are only provided as audio output Example Performing a Highly Accurate Frequency Measurement Using the Sig nal Count Marker This example demonstrates how to determine highly accurate frequency values using signal count markers in a basic spectrum measurement in a remote environment It assumes that the basic frequency sweep described in Chapte...

Page 891: ...e Suffix n Window dl 1 2 Parameters Position The value range is variable You can use any unit you want the R S FPL1000 then converts the unit to the currently selected unit If you omit a unit the R S FPL1000 uses the currently selected unit RST state is OFF Default unit DBM Example CALC DLIN2 20dBm Positions the second display line at 20 dBm Manual operation See Horizontal Line 1 Horizontal Line 2...

Page 892: ...ple CALC FLIN2 120MHz Sets frequency line 2 to a frequency of 120 MHz Manual operation See Vertical Line x on page 426 CALCulate n FLINe dl STATe State This command turns a frequency line on and off Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 frequency line Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC FLIN2 STAT ON Turns frequency line 2 on CALCulate n PLINe...

Page 893: ...ine Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC PLIN2 STAT ON Turns power line 2 on CALCulate n TLINe dl Time This command defines the position of a time line Suffix n Window dl 1 to 4 time line Parameters Time Note that you can not set a time line to a position that is higher than the current sweep time Range 0 s to 1600 s RST STATe to OF...

Page 894: ...h upper and lower limit lines Configuring Limit Lines 894 Managing Limit Lines 904 Checking the Results of a Limit Check 907 Programming Example Using Limit Lines 908 10 8 10 1 Configuring Limit Lines CALCulate n LIMit li COMMent 895 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA 895 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DOMain 895 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol MODE 896 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol OFFSet 896 CALCulate ...

Page 895: ... the limit line Manual operation See Comment on page 435 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer...

Page 896: ... Limit line Parameters Mode ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does no...

Page 897: ...fault unit HZ Manual operation See Shift x on page 437 CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol SPACing InterpolMode This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters InterpolMode LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 436 CALCulate n L...

Page 898: ...436 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Margin numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 436 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Suffix n Window li Limit line Par...

Page 899: ...cally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters Distance Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 901 Default unit DB Manual operation See Shift y on page 437 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SPACing InterpolType This command sel...

Page 900: ...n page 433 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold Threshold This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines The R S FPL1000 uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the threshold Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT on page 901 RST 200 dBm Default unit DBM Manual operation See Threshold o...

Page 901: ...ual operation See Y Axis on page 436 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer DATA LimitLinePoints This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line Suffix n irrelevant li Limit line Parameters LimitLinePoints Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate n LIMit li CONTrol DATA If not the...

Page 902: ...ute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 436 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Suffix n irre...

Page 903: ...i UPPer SPACing InterpolType This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Suffix n Window li Limit line Parameters InterpolType LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See Y Axis on page 436 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer STATe State This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the ...

Page 904: ...mands for managing limit lines described in the R S FPL1000 User Man ual MMEM SEL ITEM LIN ALL MMEM STOR TYPE Remote commands exclusive to managing limit lines CALCulate n LIMit li ACTive 904 CALCulate n LIMit li COPY 905 CALCulate n LIMit li DELete 905 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe 905 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk 906 MMEMory LOAD n LIMit 906 MMEMory STORe n LIMit 906 CALCulate n LIMit li ACTi...

Page 905: ... named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 434 CALCulate n LIMit li DELete This command deletes a limit line Suffix n Window li Limit line Manual operation See Delete Line on page 434 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe State This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL Note that a new command exists to activate...

Page 906: ...he function off ON 1 Switches the function on Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Manual operation See Traces to be Checked on page 433 MMEMory LOAD n LIMit FileName Loads the limit line from the selected file in CSV format Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the CSV import file Example MMEM LOAD LIM C T...

Page 907: ...he command works on all limit lines in all measurement windows at the same time Suffix n Window li irrelevant Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check CALCulate n LIMit li FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check in the specified window Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix li is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the curren...

Page 908: ...nfiguing the limit lines CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 Names limit line 1 FM1 CALC LIM1 CONT MODE ABS Selects absolute scaling for the horizontal axis CALC LIM1 CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz Defines 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP MODE ABS Selects an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UNIT DBM Selects the unit dBm for limit line 1 CALC LIM1 UPP 10 5 0 5 ...

Page 909: ...N MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN MMEM STOR STAT 1 LimitLines_FM1_FM3 Example Performing a Limit Check This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment The limit lines configured in Example Configuring Limit Lines on page 908 are assumed to exist and be active Preparing the instrument RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects singl...

Page 910: ...inst trace3 maxhold trace CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace2 average trace CALC LIM CLE Clears the previous limit check results Performing the measurement INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished Retrieving limit check results CALC LIM1 FAIL Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries th...

Page 911: ...fied either as absolute including the entire path or rela tive paths including only subfolders of the current folder Use the MMEM CDIR query to determine the current folder General Data Storage and Loading Commands 911 Selecting the Items to Store 917 Storing and Loading Instrument Settings 920 Storing or Printing Screenshots 925 Storing Measurement Results 935 Test Reports 937 Examples Managing D...

Page 912: ...age 209 See Export Peak List on page 386 See Decimal Separator on page 453 MMEMory CATalog FileName This command returns the contents of a particular directory Parameters FileName String containing the path and directory If you leave out the path the command returns the contents of the directory selected with MMEMory CDIRectory on page 913 The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is po...

Page 913: ...3 The path may be relative or absolute Using wildcards is possible to query a certain type of files only MMEMory CDIRectory Directory This command changes the current directory Parameters Directory String containing the path to another directory The path may be relative or absolute MMEMory COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for the stored settings Parameters Comment String containing t...

Page 914: ..._data Data block with the following structure Hash sign number Length of the length information number Length information of the binary data number of bytes data Binary data with the indicated number of bytes Parameters for setting and query FileName Example MMEM NAME Public User Testfile txt Creates a new file called testfile txt MMEM DATA Testfile txt 220Contents of the file The parameter means ...

Page 915: ...he target file Example MMEM MOVE C TEST01 CFG SETUP CFG Renames TEST01 CFG in SETUP CFG in directory C MMEMory MSIS Drive This command selects the default storage device used by all MMEMory commands Parameters Drive A C Z String containing the device drive name RST n a MMEMory NAME FileName This command has several purposes depending on the context it is used in It creates a new and empty file It ...

Page 916: ...networks first Parameters FilePath String containing the drive name or path of the directory you want to map IP String containing the host name of the computer or the IP address and the share name of the drive host name or IP address share name UserName String containing a user name in the network The user name is optional Password String containing the password corresponding to the User Name The ...

Page 917: ...rom the currently selected channel setup MMEM SELect CHANnel ITEM are stored MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 917 MMEMory SELect ITEM ALL 917 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 918 MMEMory SELect ITEM DEFault 918 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 918 MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings 918 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 919 MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL 919 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE ...

Page 918: ...l operation See Items on page 470 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings State MMEMory SELect ITEM HWSettings State This command includes or excludes measurement hardware settings when storing or loading a configuration file Measurement settings include general channel configuration measurement hardware configuration including markers limit lines Note that a configuration may include no more than ...

Page 919: ... 918 Limit lines MMEMory SELect ITEM LINes ALL on page 919 Spectrogram data MMEMory SELect ITEM SGRam on page 920 Trace data MMEMory SELect ITEM TRACe 1 3 ACTive on page 920 Transducers MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL on page 920 Example MMEM SEL NONE Manual operation See Items on page 470 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SCData State MMEMory SELect ITEM SCData State This command includes or exclude...

Page 920: ...nd includes or excludes trace data when storing or loading a configuration file Suffix 1 3 irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 i e no traces are stored Example MMEM SEL TRAC ON Manual operation See Items on page 470 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM TRANsducer ALL State MMEMory SELect ITEM TRANsducer ALL State This command includes or excludes transducer factors when storing or loading a con fi...

Page 921: ...ame String containing the path and name of the file to delete The string may or may not contain the file s extension Example MMEM CLE STAT 1 TEST MMEMory LOAD AUTO 1 FileName This command restores an instrument configuration and defines that configuration as the default state The default state is restored after a preset RST or after you turn on the R S FPL1000 Parameters 1 FileName Factory Restore...

Page 922: ...script starts with the RST command It is therefore recommended that you use the appropriate MMEMory SELect ITEM command before using MMEMory LOAD STATe Parameters 1 FileName String containing the path and name of the file to load The string may or may not include the file s extension Example MMEM SEL ALL Save all items User Settings All Traces All Limit Lines from the R S FPL1000 MMEM LOAD STAT 1 ...

Page 923: ...STOR TYP CHAN Specifies that channel setup data is to be stored MMEM STOR STAT 1 C Analyzer Spectrum Stores the settings from channel setup SPECTRUM2 to the file C Analyzer Spectrum MMEM LOAD TYPE NEW Specifies that channel setups are to be loaded in a new channel setup MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C Analyzer Spectrum Loads the channel setup from the file C Analyzer Spectrum to the new channel setup SPECTRUM2...

Page 924: ...002 dfl Manual operation See Save File on page 470 MMEMory STORe 1 2 TYPE Type This command defines whether the data from the entire instrument or only from the current channel setup is stored with the subsequent MMEM STOR command Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters Type INSTrument CHANnel INSTrument Stores data from the entire instrument CHANnel Stores data from an individual channel setup RST INST ...

Page 925: ...hots DISPlay LOGO 926 HCOPy ABORt 926 HCOPy CONTent 926 HCOPy CMAP it DEFault ci 927 HCOPy DESTination 1 2 927 HCOPy DEVice COLor 928 HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 929 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 929 HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 NEXT 930 HCOPy ITEM WINDow 1 2 TEXT 930 HCOPy PAGE COUNt STATe 930 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 BOTTom 930 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 LEFT 931 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 RIGHt 931 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP 931...

Page 926: ... available for selection How many windows are printed on a each page of the printout is defined by HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 COUNt on page 933 This option is not available when copying to the clipboard HCOP DEST SYST COMM CLIP or an image file see HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 on page 929 If the destination is currently set to an image file or the clipboard it is automatically changed to be a PDF file HCO...

Page 927: ... page 515 Gui setting Description Remote command Screen Colors Print Selects the current screen colors for the printout The background is always printed in white and the grid in black HCOP CMAP DEF1 Optimized Colors Selects an optimized color setting for the printout to improve the visibility of the colors default setting Trace 1 is blue trace 2 black trace 3 green and the markers are turquoise Th...

Page 928: ...ardcopy to the clipboard RST SYST COMM CLIP Example To print on a printer Destination printer deactivate print to file HCOP DEST1 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter Define the printer name SYST COMM PRIN SEL myFavoritePrinter Print HCOP IMM Example To print to a PRN file Destination printer HCOP DEV LANG GDI Define the printer name SYST COMM PRIN SEL myFavoritePrinter Redirect the printer output to a file...

Page 929: ...figured under Windows is used to generate a printer specific file format BMP JPG PNG Data format for output to files only DOC PDF File type for test reports Available for HCOP MODE REPort Example To print a screenshot to a PNG file Destination PNG file HCOP DEV LANG PNG Define file name MMEM NAME C R_S instr user MeasurementTestReport png Print HCOP IMM Manual operation See Destination File on pag...

Page 930: ...comment Manual operation See Comment on page 480 HCOPy PAGE COUNt STATe State This command includes or excludes the page number for printouts consisting of multi ple pages HCOPy CONTent on page 926 Parameters State 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The page number is printed 0 OFF The page number is not printed RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE COUN STAT ON Manual operation See Print Page Count on page 480 HCOPy PAGE MARGin ...

Page 931: ...RGin 1 2 RIGHt Right This command defines the margin at the right side of the printout page on which no elements are printed The margins are defined according to HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT on page 932 Suffix 1 2 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters Right RST 4 23 mm Example HCOP PAGE MARG2 RIGH 2 Manual operation See Margins on page 487 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP Top This command defines the margin at the top...

Page 932: ... The command is only available if the output device is a printer or a PDF file Suffix 1 2 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait RST PORTrait Example HCOP DEV LANG1 PDF HCOP PAGE ORI2 LAND Manual operation See Orientation on page 487 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe arg0 arg1 This command selects all windows of the specified channel setup to be included in the printout for HCO...

Page 933: ...2 irrelevant Parameters arg0 integer RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 COUN 2 Manual operation See Windows Per Page on page 487 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 SCALe arg0 This command determines the scaling of the windows in the printout for HCOPy CONTent on page 926 Suffix 1 2 irrelevant Parameters arg0 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON Each window is scaled to fit the page size optimally not regard ing the aspect ratio of the ...

Page 934: ...window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active channel setup use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query arg2 1 0 ON OFF 1 ON The window is included in the printout 0 OFF The window is not included in the printout RST 1 Example HCOP PAGE WIND2 STAT IQ Analyzer 1 1 Manual operation See Print Multiple Windows on page 480 HCOPy TDSTamp STATe 1 2 State This...

Page 935: ...RINter SELect 1 2 arg0 This command selects the printer that processes jobs sent by the R S FPL1000 Use HCOPy DESTination 1 2 to select another output destination Suffix 1 2 1 2 Irrelevant Parameters arg0 String containing the printer name Use SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt on page 935and SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT on page 935 to query all available printers RST NONE Man...

Page 936: ...TORe n LIST FileName This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Suffix n Window Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file Manual operation See Saving the Result Summary Evaluation List to a File on page 187 See Save Ev...

Page 937: ...tion See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 454 MMEMory STORe n SPURious FileName This command exports the marker peak list available for spurious emission measure ments to a file Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR SPUR test Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat 10 9 6 Test Reports Commands to create te...

Page 938: ...947 HCOPy MODE Mode Selects the output of the HCOPy IMMediate 1 2 command Parameters Mode SCReen HCOPy IMMediate prints the current screen contents REPort HCOPy IMMediate generates a measurement report RST SCReen Example HCOP MODE REPort HCOP Creates a file containing the measurement report Manual operation See Save on page 505 HCOPy TREPort APPend This command adds the current measurement results...

Page 939: ...measurement information titles Example HCOP TREP ITEM DEF Restores the default test report configuration Usage Event Manual operation See Default on page 503 HCOPy TREPort ITEM HEADer LINE line CONTrol Repetition This command selects how often the items in the report header are displayed in the document Suffix line 1 6 Selects the header line Parameters Repetition GLOBal The selected header line i...

Page 940: ...x line 1 6 Selects the header line Parameters Description String containing the description of one of the value fields By default the value fields of the items are empty Example HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD LINE3 TITL Device under Test Renames the third title into Device under Test HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD LINE3 TEXT Some Device Labels the third title as Some Device Manual operation See Value on page 500 HCOPy ...

Page 941: ...n from the test report Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example HCOP TREP ITEM HEAD STAT ON Includes the measurement information in the test report Manual operation See State on page 500 HCOPy TREPort ITEM LIST ChannelType This command queries the selected information to be included in the test report for a specific channel type Parameters ChannelType Selects the channel type that you want to query ...

Page 942: ...he selected header line is displayed at the top of every page of the report NEVer The selected header line is displayed on no page of the report Note that a line that does not contain anything is still displayed in the report as a blank line If you select NEVer the line is not dis played at all RST NEVer Example HCOP TREP ITEM LOGO c logo png Selects a picture to be displayed in the report documen...

Page 943: ... Description SAN Spectrum Table 10 11 Available items in spectrum application Item Description Default DIAGram Screenshot of the scan results x MARKers Contents of the marker table x PEAKlist Contents of the peak list x RSUMmary Contents of the result summary x SETTings Settings that have been used during a measurement x SPECtrogram Screenshot of the spectrogram x RESultlist List of trace point va...

Page 944: ...ad on page 503 HCOPy TREPort ITEM TEMPlate SAVE Template This command saves a test report template in XML format Parameters Template String containing the name of the template The xml file exten sion is added automatically Example HCOP TREP ITEM TEMP SAVE myTemplate Saves a test report template Usage Event Manual operation See Save on page 503 HCOPy TREPort NEW This command creates a new dataset f...

Page 945: ... command includes or excludes page number from the test report Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example HCOP TREP PAG STAT OFF Removes page numbers from the test report Manual operation See Page Count on page 496 HCOPy TREPort PCOLors STATe State This command turns the use of printer friendly colors on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example HCOP TREP PCOL ON Creates the test report with pri...

Page 946: ... Set 2 Number of the dataset would be 2 Subset Cannot be removed Parameters Dataset Index number of the dataset as shown in the Test Report Con tent Selection dialog box If the index number is greater than the number of available data sets the command returns an error Example HCOP TREP TEST REM 2 Deletes the second dataset from the current test report Manual operation See Selecting items to includ...

Page 947: ...MEMory RAW Path Defines the location where the measurement data sets for the report are stored until the report is created Parameters Path String containing the path of the preliminary data Manual operation See Raw Data Storage on page 496 10 9 7 Examples Managing Data Storing Data 947 Loading Data 948 Storing Instrument Settings 949 Loading Instrument Settings 949 Printing to a File 949 Printing ...

Page 948: ...M DEL C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 txt Deletes the specified file from the instrument hard disk or MMEM MOVE C R_S INSTR USER Results Test001 xml Q TestResults txt Moves the file Test001 txt to drive Q renames it to Testresults txt and removes it from the instrument hard disk MMEM RDIR C R_S INSTR USER Results Deletes the directory called Results from drive C unless it still contains any conte...

Page 949: ...MMEM SEL CHAN HWS ON Selects only hardware settings to be loaded MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C R_S Instr user Spectrum Loads the channel specific settings from the file C R_S Instr user Spectrum dfl to a new channel The new channel is named Spectrum2 to avoid a naming conflict with the existing Spectrum channel INST REN Spectrum2 Spectrum3 Renames the loaded channel to Spectrum3 10 9 7 5 Printing to a File S...

Page 950: ... PDF file It assumes the Spec trum and I Q Analyzer measurements have already been configured and performed with the following screen layout Spectrum 1 Frequency Sweep Spectrum 2 Spectrogram IQ Analyzer 1 Magnitude IQ Analyzer 2 Spectrum Switch to MultiView tab DISP ATAB ON Select windows to be stored to file HCOP CONT WIND HCOP PAGE WIND STAT Spectrum 1 ON HCOP PAGE WIND STAT Spectrum 2 ON HCOP P...

Page 951: ... Calibration and Checks 952 Working with Transducers 955 Customizing the Screen Layout 959 Remote Commands for Language Settings 964 Configuring the Network and Remote Control 964 Checking the System Configuration 968 Using Service Functions 972 10 10 1 Configuring the Reference Frequency SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 951 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce Source This command selects the reference oscillator If ...

Page 952: ...control commands In order to recognize when the acquisition of correction data is completed the MAV bit in the status byte can be used If the associated bit is set in the Service Request Enable SRE register the instrument generates a service request after the acquisition of correction data has been completed Return values CalibrationFailed ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Calibration was successful ON 1 Calibrati...

Page 953: ...d sets the calibration frequency for frequencies greater than 7 GHz This command only takes effect if a microwave calibration signal is selected for input DIAGnostic SERVice INPut SELect on page 953 Parameters Frequency RST 7 GHz Default unit Hz Example DIAG SERV INP PULS MCFR 7 1 GHz DIAGnostic SERVice INPut RF SPECtrum Bandwidth This command selects the bandwidth of the calibration signal Parame...

Page 954: ... 09 07 2004 TIME 16 24 54 Runtime 00 06 Usage Query only SOURce si TEMPerature FRONtend This command queries the current frontend temperature of the R S FPL1000 During self alignment the instrument s frontend temperature is also measured as soon as the instrument has warmed up completely This temperature is used as a ref erence for a continuous temperature check during operation If the current tem...

Page 955: ...r 958 MMEMory STORe n TFACtor 958 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer ADJust RLEVel STATe State This command turns an automatic adjustment of the reference level to the transducer on and off Before you can use the command you have to select and turn on a transducer Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Manual operation See Adjust Ref Level on page 535 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer CATalog This command queries a...

Page 956: ...T empty comment Manual operation See Comment on page 537 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer DATA Frequency Level This command configures transducer factors for specific trace points A set of trans ducer factors defines an interpolated transducer line and can be stored on the instru ment Parameters Frequency The unit for Frequency is Hz which may or may not be omit ted Frequencies have to be sorted in asc...

Page 957: ... a transducer factor Parameters Name String containing the name of the transducer factor If the name does not exist yet the R S FPL1000 creates a transducer factor by that name Example CORR TRAN SEL FACTOR1 Manual operation See Activating Deactivating on page 535 See Create New Line on page 535 See Name on page 537 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer STATe State This command turns the selected transducer ...

Page 958: ...ads the transducer factor from the selected file in CSV format Suffix n irrelevant Parameters FileName String containing the path and name of the CSV import file Example MMEM LOAD TFAC C TEST CSV Manual operation See Import on page 538 MMEMory STORe n TFACtor FileName TransdName This command exports transducer factor data to an ASCII CSV file For details on the file format see Chapter 8 7 3 Refere...

Page 959: ...ay and screen ele ments Useful commands for general display settings described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow n MTABle on page 837 Remote commands exclusive to general display settings DISPlay ANNotation CBAR 959 DISPlay BLIGhting 960 DISPlay ANNotation FREQuency 960 DISPlay SBAR STATe 960 DISPlay SKEYs STATe 960 DISPlay TBAR STATe 960 DISPlay TOUChscreen STATe 961 DISPlay WINDow n TIME 961 DISPlay WIND...

Page 960: ... x axis on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP ANN FREQ OFF Manual operation See Diagram Footer Annotation on page 512 DISPlay SBAR STATe State This command turns the status bar on and off Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DISP SBAR OFF Manual operation See Status Bar on page 511 DISPlay SKEYs STATe State This command turns the softkey bar on and off Parameters State ON ...

Page 961: ...ch screen is inactivate for the diagram area of the screen but active for softkeys toolbars and menus RST 1 Example DISP TOUC STAT ON Manual operation See Deactivating and Activating the Touchscreen on page 510 DISPlay WINDow n TIME State This command adds or removes the date and time from the display Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example DISP TIME ON Manual operation See D...

Page 962: ...s or excludes the front panel keys when working with the remote desktop Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Manual operation See Front Panel on page 512 See Mini Front Panel on page 513 SYSTem DATE Year Month Day Configures the date on the instrument Parameters Year Month Day Example SYST DATE 2020 04 23 Manual operation See Set Date and Time on page 510 SYSTem TIME Year Month Day Configures the tim...

Page 963: ...y CMAP it DEFault ci This command selects the color scheme for the display The query returns the default color scheme Suffix it Irrelevant ci 1 Default color set 1 with a black background and white grid 2 Default color set 2 with a white background and a black grid Suffix irrelevant for query Return values DefScheme 1 2 3 The default color scheme used for the screen as specified by the ci suffix E...

Page 964: ...JA KO RU ZH_CH Simplified Chinese ZH_TW Traditional Chinese RST EN Example SYST DISP LANG JA Switches the language of the instrument to Japanese 10 10 6 Configuring the Network and Remote Control The following commands are required to configure a network or remote control for the R S FPL1000 Useful commands for configuring remote control described elsewhere SYSTem LANGuage on page 975 Remote comma...

Page 965: ...nstrument to the control computer does not require such a terminator change Parameters Terminator LFEOI EOI LFEOI According to the standard the terminator in ASCII is LF and or EOI EOI For binary data transfers e g trace data from the control com puter to the instrument the binary code used for LF might be included in the binary data block and therefore should not be interpreted as a terminator in...

Page 966: ...STem ERRor DISPlay State This command the error display during remote operation on and off If activated the R S FPL1000 displays a message box at the bottom of the screen that contains the most recent type of error and the command that caused the error Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example SYST ERR DISP ON Manual operation See Display Remote Errors on page 570 SYSTem IDENtify FACTory This comm...

Page 967: ...meters Language FSV SCPI RST SCPI Example SYST LANG FSV The commands and settings for the R S FSV instrument are used SYSTem LXI LANReset This command resets the LAN configuration as well as the LAN password and instrument description Manual operation See LAN Reset on page 574 SYSTem LXI MDEScription Description This command defines the LAN instrument description Parameters Description String cont...

Page 968: ...SERVice BATTery LEVel 968 DIAGnostic SERVice BIOSinfo 968 DIAGnostic SERVice HWINfo 969 DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo 969 SYSTem ERRor CLEar ALL 969 SYSTem ERRor CLEar REMote 969 SYSTem ERRor EXTended 970 SYSTem ERRor LIST 970 SYSTem ERRor NEXT 971 SYSTem FIRMware UPDate 971 SYSTem FORMat IDENt 971 DIAGnostic SERVice BATTery LEVel Queries the joint charge state of the internal batteries with interna...

Page 969: ...component Example DIAG SERV HWIN Queries the hardware information FRONTEND 100001 003 1300 3009 03 01 00 00 MOTHERBOARD 123456 002 1300 3080 02 00 00 00 Usage Query only DIAGnostic SERVice VERSinfo This command queries information about the hardware and software components Return values Information String containing the version of hardware and software compo nents including the types of licenses f...

Page 970: ...e EXTended INFO Register on page 560 Parameters MessageType ALL INFO WARNing FATal ERRor MESSage ChannelName String containing the name of the channel setup The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel setup Return values Messages String containing all messages of the selected type for the speci fied channel setup Each message is separated by a comma ...

Page 971: ...eue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device specific errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned For details on error queues see Chapter 9 2 Status Reporting System on page 552 Usage Query only SYSTem FIRMware UPDate Directory This command starts a firmware update using the msi files in the...

Page 972: ... have entered the level 1 or level 2 system password Parameters for setting and query ServiceFunction String containing the ID of the service function The ID of the service function is made up out of five numbers separated by a point function group number board number function number parameter 1 see the Service Manual parameter 2 see the Service Manual Example DIAG SERV SFUN Function1 DIAG SERV SF...

Page 973: ...chwarz support to get help for a certain problem send this file to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Return values FileName C Users Public Documents Rohde Schwarz Analyzer user R S Device ID _ CurrentDate _ CurrentTime String containing the drive path and file name of the created support file where the file name consists of the following ele ments R S Device ID The uniq...

Page 974: ...s 1004 10 11 1 Setting up Instrument Emulation The following commands are required to set up the use of commands to emulate other instruments Useful commands for emulating other instruments described elsewhere SYSTem REVision FACTory on page 968 Remote commands exclusive to emulating other instruments SYSTem HPCoupling 974 SYSTem IFGain MODE 975 SYSTem LANGuage 975 SYSTem PSA WIDeband 975 SYSTem R...

Page 975: ...for pulsed signals overload limit up to 10 dB above reference level RST NORM Example SYST IFG MODE PULS Manual operation See IF Gain on page 572 SYSTem LANGuage Language This command selects the system language Example SYST LANG PSA Emulates the PSA Manual operation See Language on page 572 SYSTem PSA WIDeband State This command defines which option is returned when the OPT query is executed depen...

Page 976: ...n page 976 If the repeated sweep is OFF the marker is set without sweeping before This command is only available if a HP language is selected using SYSTem LANGuage on page 975 Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 RST 0 Example SYSTem RSW ON Manual operation See Sweep Repeat on page 572 10 11 2 Reference GPIB Commands of Emulated HP Models The R S FPL1000 analyzer family supports a subset of the GPIB comman...

Page 977: ...ormats 1004 GPIB Status Reporting 1004 10 11 2 1 Command Set of Models 8560E 8561E 8562E 8563E 8564E 8565E 8566A B 8568A B 8591E 8594E 71100C 71200C and 71209A As with the original units the R S FPL1000 includes the command set of the A models in the command set of the B models The HP model 8591E is compatible to HP model 8594E the HP models 71100C 71200C and 71209A are compatible to HP models 856...

Page 978: ... 1 0 AMB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8594E available AMBPL AMBPL ON OFF AMBPL 1 0 AMBPL HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ANNOT ANNOT ON OFF ANNOT 1 0 ANNOT Annotation HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available APB APB Trace A B Trace A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available AT AT numeric_value DB DM AT DN AT UP AT AUTO AT Attenuation HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP ...

Page 979: ...HP 8568A available B4 B4 Blank B HP 8566A HP 8568A available BL BL Trace B Display Line Trace B HP 8566A HP 8568A available BML BML Trace B Display Line Trace B HP 856xE HP8594E available BTC BTC Transfer Trace B C HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available BXC BXC Exchange Trace B and C HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available BLANK BLANK TRA TRB TRC Blank Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B...

Page 980: ...le CHPWRBW CHPWRBW numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ Channel Power Band width HP 856xE HP 8594E available CLRW CLRW TRA TRB TRC Clear Write Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CLS 1 CLS Clear all status bits HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available CONTS CONTS HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available COUPLE COUPLE AC DC Input coupling HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E availa...

Page 981: ...tion AGC HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DEMODT DEMODT numeric_value S MS US SC DEMODT UP DN DEMODT Demodulation time HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DET DET POS SMP NEG DET Detector HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DISPOSE 2 ONEOS TRMATH ONSWP ALL numeric_value available DIV Divide HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available DL DL numeric_value DB DM DL DN DL UP ...

Page 982: ...6xE available EDITLIML edit limit line HP 856xE available ERR ERR 250 cal level error ERR 300 LO unlock ERR 472 cal error digital filter ERR 473 cal error ana log filter ERR 552 cal error log amp ERR 902 unscale track ing generator ERR 906 oven cold ERR 117 numeric unit error ERR 112 Unrecognized Command Now some FSx errors are mapped to HP errors HP8568A HP856xE not yet availa ble ERR ERR Error q...

Page 983: ...uency Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FREF FREF INT EXT Reference Frequency HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available FS FS Full Span HP 8566A HP 8568A available FUNCDEF Define Function Function must be in one line between delimiters HP 8594E HP 856xE HP 8566B available GATE 1 GATE ON OFF GATE 1 0 HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available GATECTL 1 GATECTL EDGE LEVEL G...

Page 984: ...available I2 I2 HP 8566A HP 8568A available ID ID ID Identify HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available INZ 1 INZ 75 INZ 50 INZ Input Impedance HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available IP IP Instrument preset HP 8566A HP 8568A available KEYDEF KEYDEF Key definition HP 8566B HP 856xE HP 859xE available KEYEXEC KEYEXEC Key execute HP 8566B available KS KS numeric_value HZ ...

Page 985: ...ailable KSE KSE numeric_value char data Title mode HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSG KSG KSG ON KSG numeric_value Video Averaging on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSH KSH Video Averaging Off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSK Marker to Next Peak HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSL Marker Noise off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSM Marker Noise on HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSO KSO Deltamarker to span HP 8566A...

Page 986: ...ailable KSd KSd Neg Peak Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSe KSe Sample Detection HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSg CRT beam off available KSh CRT beam on available KSj KSj View Trace C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSk KSk Blank Trace C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSl KSl Transfer B to C HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSm KSm Graticule off HP 8566A HP 8568A available KSn2 KSn Grid on HP 8566A HP 8...

Page 987: ...ble LIMIRCL recall limit line HP 856xE available LIMIREL relative limit line HP 856xE available LIMISAV save limit line HP 856xE available LIMITEST limit line test HP 856xE available LIML lower limit line value HP 856xE available LIMM middle limit line value HP 856xE available LIMTFL flat limit line segment HP 856xE available LIMTSL slope limit line segment HP 856xE available LIMU upper limit line...

Page 988: ...P 8566A HP 8568A available MC0 MC0 Marker Count off HP 8566A HP 8568A available MC1 MC1 Marker Count on HP 8566A HP 8568A available MDS MDS Measurement data size HP 8566B available MEAS Measurement status HP 856xE available MF MF MF Marker Frequency HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MINH1 MINH TRC Minimum Hold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKA MKA nume...

Page 989: ... MHZ GHZ S SC MS MSEC USMKDR Delta Marker reverse HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKDR Delta Marker reverse query available MKF MKF numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKF Set Marker Frequency HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKFC MKFC ON OFF Frequency Counter on off HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKFCR 1 MKFCR numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ MKFCR DN MKFCR UP MKFCR...

Page 990: ... Marker off HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKP MKP numeric_value MKP Marker position HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKPK MKPK MKPK HI MKPK NH MKPK NR MKPK NL Marker Search HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKPT MKPT MKPT HI MKPT NH MKPT NR MKPT NL Marker Peak Threshold HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKPX MKPX numeric_value DB MKPX DN MKPX UP...

Page 991: ...8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTRACK MKTRACK ON OFF MKTRACK 1 0 MKTRACK Signal Track HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MKTYPE MKTYPE AMP MK TYPE Marker type HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ML Mixer level HP 856xE available MOV MOV TRA TRB TRC TRA TRB T RC Move Trace Contents HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available MPY Multiply HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E availab...

Page 992: ...t ASCII HP 8566A HP 8568A available OA OA Output All HP 8566A HP 8568A available OL OL 80 characters OL Output Learn String HP 8566A HP 8568A available OT OT Output Trace Annota tions HP 8566A HP 8568A available PA PA numeric_value numeric_value Plot command HP 8566A HP 8568A available PD PD numeric_value numeric_value Plot command HP 8566A HP 8568A available PH_MKF Spot frequency in Hz HP 856xE a...

Page 993: ...IN and PH_FMAX HP 856xE available PH_MEAS Generates log frequency plot HP 856xE available PH_MKF_D Updates the spot fre quency HP 856xE available PH_RMS Requests the rms phase noise HP 856xE available PH_RMSFT Updates internal fre quency variables HP 856xE available PH_RMSX Calculates the rms phase noise HP 856xE available PH_SPOTF Executes the spot fre quency measurement HP 856xE available PLOTOR...

Page 994: ...available R2 R2 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R3 R3 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available R4 R4 Set Status Bit Enable HP 8566A HP 8568A available RB RB numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ RB DN RB UP RB AUTO RB Resolution Bandwidth HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RBR RBR numeric_value RBR DN RBR UP RBR Resolution Bandwidth Ratio HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP ...

Page 995: ...8B HP 8594E available RCLOSCAL RCLOSCAL Recall Open Short Aver age HP 856xE HP 8594E not available RCLTHRU RCLTHRU Recall Thru HP 856xE HP 8594E not available RLPOS 1 RLPOS numeric_value RLPOS DN RLPOS UP RLPOS Reference Level Position HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available ROFFSET ROFFSET numeric_value DB DM ROFFSET Reference Level Offset HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available RQS R...

Page 996: ...points Smooth Trace HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SNGLS SNGLS Single Sweep HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SQUELCH 2 SQUELCH numeric_value DM DB SQUELCH UP DN SQUELCH ON OFF Squelch HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SP SP numeric_value HZ KHZ MHZ GHZ SP DN SP UP SP Span HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available SRCNORM 1 SRCNORM ON OF...

Page 997: ...able ST ST numeric_value US MS SC ST DN ST UP ST AUTO ST Sweep Time HP 8566A HP 8568A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available STB STB Status byte query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available STOREOPEN STOREOPEN Store Open HP 856xE HP 8594E not available STORESHORT STORESHORT Store Short HP 856xE HP 8594E not available STORETHRU STORETHRU Store Thru HP 856xE HP 8594E not available SUB ...

Page 998: ... 8566A HP 8568A available T3 T3 External Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available T4 T4 Video Trigger HP 8566A HP 8568A available TA TA Transfer A HP 8566A HP 8568A available TACL TACL Returns instantaneous measurement results See TRACe trace IMMediate LEVel for full description not available TBCL TBCL TCCL TCCL TACR TACR Returns instantaneous measurement results See TRACe trace IMMediate LEVel for ful...

Page 999: ...splay HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TM TM FREE VID EXT LINE2 TM Trigger Mode HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TM LINE 2 TM LINE Trigger Line HP 8566B available TRA TRA B TRA A TRA I Transfer A HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TRB TRB B TRB A TRB I Transfer B HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available TRSTAT TRSTAT Trace State Query HP 856xE HP 8566B HP ...

Page 1000: ...IEW VIEW TRA TRB TRC HP 856xE HP 8566B HP 8568B HP 8594E available VTL VTL numeric_value DB DM VTL DN VTL UP VTL Video Trigger Level HP 856xE HP 8594E not available 1 HP 8594E only 2 Command is accepted without error message but is ignored 10 11 2 2 Special Features of the Syntax Parsing Algorithms for 8566A and 8568A Models The command syntax is very different for models A and B Different names a...

Page 1001: ... the status byte An addi tional DONE is required for that purpose ANNOT Only frequency axis annotation is affected AT AT DN UP Step size CAL The CAL commands do not automatically set the command complete bit bit 4 in the sta tus byte An additional DONE command is required for that purpose CF Default value range step size CR Default ratio Span RBW CT Formula for coupled sweep time CV Default ratio ...

Page 1002: ...even if the tracking generator normalization is not active RQS Supported bits 1 Units key pressed 2 End of Sweep 3 Device error 4 Command complete 5 Illegal command 10 11 2 4 Model Dependent Default Settings If the GPIB language is switched over to an 85xx model the GPIB address is automati cally switched over to 18 provided that the default address of the R S FPL1000 20 is still set If a differen...

Page 1003: ...sed by the original instruments this applies in particular to the number of characters returned Two formats are currently supported when trace data is output Display Units com mand O1 and physical values command O2 O3 or TDF P As to the Display Units format the level data of the R S FPL1000 is converted to match the value range and the resolution of the 8566 8568 series Upon transition to the REMO...

Page 1004: ...eys if bit 1 was enabled Another difference is the behavior of bit 6 when using the STB query On the HP ana lyzers this bit monitors the state of the SRQ line on the bus On the R S FPL1000 this is not possible Therefore this bit is set as soon as one of the bits 1 to 5 is set It won t be reset by performing a serial poll 10 11 3 Reference Command Set of Emulated CXA EXA Models The R S FPL1000 anal...

Page 1005: ... 12 X freq time CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 X POSition real CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X SPAN CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X STARt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 4 X STOP CALCulate MARKer 1 2 12 Y real CALibration ALL CALibration AUTO ON PARTial OFF ALERt CALibration AUTO ALERt TTEMperature DAY WEEK NONE CALibration AUTO MODE ALL NRF CALibration AUTO TIME OFF CONFigure SAN DISPlay WINDow 1 TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel real DISPl...

Page 1006: ...IDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DETector AUTO ON OFF 1 0 SENSe FREQuency CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet freq SENSe FREQuency SPAN freq SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL SENSe FREQuency STARt freq SENSe FREQuency STOP freq SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation rel_ampl SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep POINts integer SENSe SWEep TIME time SEN...

Page 1007: ...e ACPLimit Register on page 558 Chapter 9 2 2 7 STATus QUEStionable EXTended Register on page 559 Chapter 9 2 2 9 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register on page 560 Chapter 9 2 2 10 STATus QUEStionable LIMit Register on page 561 Chapter 9 2 2 11 STATus QUEStionable LMARgin Register on page 561 Chapter 9 2 2 12 STATus QUEStionable POWer Register on page 562 Chapter 9 2 2 13 STATus QUEStionable TEMP...

Page 1008: ...mand is identical to the SYSTem ERRor NEXT command Usage Query only 10 12 2 Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition ChannelName STATus QUEStionable LIMit ...

Page 1009: ...ommand works for the currently active channel Usage Query only 10 12 4 Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle SumBit STATus QUEStionable ENABle SumBit STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable EXTended INFO ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle SumBit ChannelName STATus QUE...

Page 1010: ...tionable TIME NTRansition SumBit ChannelName These commands control the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Suffix n Window Parameters SumBit Range 0 to 65535 ChannelName String containing the name of the channel...

Page 1011: ...e transition and enable registers are set In addition the ser vice request event must be enabled in the VISA session 10 12 7 1 Initiate Service Request REM Example of initialization of the SRQ in the case of errors PUBLIC SUB SetupSRQ CALL InstrWrite analyzer CLS Reset status reporting system CALL InstrWrite analyzer SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register CALL Inst...

Page 1012: ...ng system mbSession Write SRE 168 Enable service request for STAT OPER STAT QUES and ESR register mbSession Write ESE 60 Set event enable bit for command execution device dependent and query error mbSession Write STAT OPER ENAB 32767 Set OPERation enable bit for all events mbSession Write STAT OPER PTR 32767 Set appropriate OPERation Ptransition bits mbSession Write STAT QUES ENAB 32767 Set questi...

Page 1013: ...led by an SRQ is short shorter than the selected timeout if no response to user inputs is required during the waiting time and if as the main criterion the event is absolutely certain to occur Reason From the time the viWaitOnEvent function is called until the occurrence of the expec ted event it does not allow the program to respond to mouse clicks or key entries dur ing the waiting time Moreover...

Page 1014: ...ements The method necessitates a waiting loop that checks the status of the SRQ line at regu lar intervals and returns control to the operating system during the time the expected event has not yet occurred In this way the system can respond to user inputs mouse clicks key entries during the waiting time It is advisable to employ the Hold auxiliary function which returns control to the oper ating ...

Page 1015: ...riod of the waiting time selectable in millisec onds Rem Rem The waiting function below expects the transfer of the desired Rem waiting time in milliseconds The keyboard and the mouse remain Rem operative during the waiting period thus allowing desired elements Rem to be controlled Rem Public Sub Hold delayTime As Single Start Timer Save timer count on calling the function Do While Timer Start del...

Page 1016: ...ueueHandler If mySTB And 8 0 Then Call Questionablestatus If mySTB And 128 0 Then Call Operationstatus If mySTB And 32 0 Then Call Esrread End If Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub End of SRQ routine Reading out the status event registers the output buffer and the error event queue is effected in subroutines 10 12 7 5 Reading Out the Output Buffer REM Subroutine f...

Page 1017: ...String Dim parts As String result Split If parts 0 0 Then hasErr False Console WriteLine result Else Console WriteLine result End If Loop While hasErr End Sub 10 12 7 7 Evaluation of SCPI Status Registers REM Subroutine for evaluating Questionable Status Register Public SUB Questionablestatus Ques SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer STATus QUEStionable EVENt CALL ...

Page 1018: ...xp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 10 12 7 8 Evaluation of Event Status Register REM Subroutine for evaluating the Event Status Register Public SUB Esrread Esr SPACE 20 Preallocate blanks to text variable CALL InstrWrite analyzer ESR Read ESR CALL InstrRead analyzer Esr IF VAL Esr AND 1 0 THEN Debug Print Operation complete IF VAL Esr AND 2 0 THEN Debug Print Request Con...

Page 1019: ...f If myESR And 64 0 Then Console WriteLine User request If myESR And 128 0 Then Console WriteLine Power on Catch exp As Exception Console WriteLine exp Message End Try End Sub 10 13 Deprecated Commands The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t 1019 DISPlay ...

Page 1020: ...fix n Window Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on DISPlay WINDow n TYPE WindowType This command selects the results displayed in a measurement window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see Chapter 10 7 1 Working with Win dows in the Display on page 739 The p...

Page 1021: ...m pleted correctly Orange Warning An irregular situation occurred during measurement e g the settings no lon ger match the displayed results or the connection to an external device was interrupted temporarily Gray Information Information on the status of individual processing steps No color No errors No message displayed normal operation Green Measurement successful Some applications visualize tha...

Page 1022: ... details refer to Chapter 4 1 13 Performing a Self Alignment on page 29 WRONG_FW The firmware version is out of date and does not support the currently installed hard ware Until the firmware version is updated this error message is displayed and self alignment fails For details refer to Chapter 8 4 4 Firmware Updates on page 522 BATT LOW Battery running low Replace or charge battery to continue op...

Page 1023: ...s message is displayed when the selected printer is not included in the list of available output devices A possible cause is that the required printer driver is missing or incorrectly installed 2034 CPU Temperature is too high This message is displayed when the temperature of the processor exceeds 70 C 11 3 Troubleshooting Remote Operation If problems arise during measurement in remote operation t...

Page 1024: ... does not provide the expected results and you are using a GPIB connection you can log the commands and any errors that may occur To activate the SCPI error log function in the Network Remote dialog box in the GPIB tab select I O Logging All remote control commands received by the R S FPL1000 are recorded in log files with the following syntax C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL ScpiLogging ScpiLo...

Page 1025: ... R S FPL1000 s web browser interface several users can access and oper ate the same instrument simultaneously This is useful for troubleshooting or training purposes Type the instrument s host name or IP address in the address field of the browser on your PC for example http 10 113 10 203 The instrument home page welcome page opens Note This function can be deactivated for the instrument After a f...

Page 1026: ...pplied to the current measure ment Now a new save set with the updated limit values can be created 11 5 System Recovery The system drive of the R S FPL1000 is delivered with a recovery partition that allows you to restore the original operating system image and firmware To restore the original operating system image and firmware 1 Press the Windows key on the front panel or press the Windows key o...

Page 1027: ...SERVice SINFo command or as described in To collect the support information on page 1027 Error Log The RSError log file in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL log directory contains a chro nological record of errors Support file a zip file with important support information can be created auto matically in the C ProgramData Rohde Schwarz ZNL FPL user directory The zip file contains the system ...

Page 1028: ...needs to be transported or shipped observe the notes described in Chapter 12 5 Transporting on page 1031 11 7 Contacting Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde Schwarz product contact our customer sup port center A team of highly qualified engineers provides support and works with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the ...

Page 1029: ...Troubleshooting R S FPL1000 1029 User Manual 1178 3370 02 11 Figure 11 2 QR code to the Rohde Schwarz support page Contacting Customer Support ...

Page 1030: ...ilt into the AC power supply connector Only use fuses of the type 5A T IEC60127 2 V order no 0099 6735 00 Such fuses are used for all of the specified nominal AC supply vol tages If the R S FPL1000 does not start it is possible that a blown fuse is the cause The fuse is located in the socket of the power supply 1 WARNING The fuse is part of the main power supply Handling the fuse while the power i...

Page 1031: ...nstructions in xref Storage Otherwise observe the following rules Prevent short circuiting of the batteries which can happen if batteries touch each other or come into contact with metallic objects in the storage container As storage container you can use the product packaging Do not expose to direct sunlight Store the battery at room temperature Store the battery at a state of charge between 50 a...

Page 1032: ...ed of in normal household waste after it has come to the end of its service life Even disposal via the municipal collection points for waste electrical and electronic equipment is not permitted Figure 12 1 Labeling in line with EU directive WEEE Rohde Schwarz has developed a disposal concept for the eco friendly disposal or recycling of waste material As a manufacturer Rohde Schwarz completely ful...

Page 1033: ...Dwidth RESolution RATio 759 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE 759 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo 760 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo AUTO 760 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo RATio 761 SENSe BWIDth VIDeo TYPE 761 SENSe BWIDth RESolution 758 SENSe BWIDth RESolution AUTO 759 SENSe BWIDth RESolution RATio 759 SENSe BWIDth RESolution TYPE 759 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire 793 SENSe CORRection METHod 794 SENSe CORRection RECall 794 SENSe C...

Page 1034: ...RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STARt FUNCtion 659 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP 659 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP ABS 660 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li RELative STOP FUNCtion 661 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri LIMit li STATe 661 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri MLCalc 662 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri POINts MINimum VALue 662 SENSe ESPectrum sb RANGe ri RLEVel 66...

Page 1035: ...ENSe LIST RANGe ri FREQuency STOP 680 SENSe LIST XADJust 688 SENSe MPOWer FTYPe 734 SENSe MPOWer RESult MIN 735 SENSe MPOWer RESult LIST 734 SENSe MPOWer SEQuence 734 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle VALue 785 SENSe PMETer p DCYCle STATe 785 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency 786 SENSe PMETer p FREQuency LINK 786 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe 787 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt 787 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe 787 SEN...

Page 1036: ...h 631 SENSe POWer ACHannel SPACing ACHannel 630 SENSe POWer ACHannel TXCHannel COUNt 631 SENSe POWer BANDwidth 646 SENSe POWer BWIDth 646 SENSe POWer TRACe 621 SENSe ROSCillator SOURce 951 SENSe SWEep COUNt 762 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent 617 SENSe SWEep DURation 762 SENSe SWEep EGATe 776 SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff 776 SENSe SWEep EGATe LENGth 777 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity 777 SENSe SWEep EGATe SOUR...

Page 1037: ...marker m FUNCtion FMEasurement PSEarch AUTO 721 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement RESult 724 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FMEasurement STATe 719 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise AUTO 868 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise RESult 868 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion PNOise STATe 869 CALCulate n DELTamarker m LINK 832 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT 847 C...

Page 1038: ...er ms LINK TO MARKer md 832 CALCulate n DLINe dl 891 CALCulate n DLINe dl STATe 891 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch AUTO 672 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch DETails 686 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch MARGin 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch PSHow 673 CALCulate n ESPectrum PEAKsearch IMMediate 672 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch AUTO 672 CALCulate n ESPectrum PSEarch DETails 686 CALCulate n ES...

Page 1039: ...t li LOWer SHIFt 899 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer SPACing 899 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer STATe 900 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer THReshold 900 CALCulate n LIMit li LOWer DATA 897 CALCulate n LIMit li NAME 900 CALCulate n LIMit li STATe 905 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t 1019 CALCulate n LIMit li TRACe t CHECk 906 CALCulate n LIMit li UNIT 901 CALCulate n LIMit li UPPer MARGin 901 CALCulate n LIMit li UPP...

Page 1040: ...er m FUNCtion HARMonics LIST 712 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics NHARmonics 711 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics PRESet 711 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion HARMonics STATe 710 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth RESult t 718 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth SEARchsignal ONCE 717 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MDEPth STATe 717 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion MSUMmary 733 CALCulate n ...

Page 1041: ... n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary RMS STATe 702 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation AVERage RESult 707 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation PHOLd RESult 707 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation RESult 708 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary SDEViation STATe 703 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion SUMMary STATe 701 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion TOI RESult MAXimum 715 CAL...

Page 1042: ...ARKer m TRACe 836 CALCulate n MARKer m X 837 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits LEFT 840 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits RIGHt 841 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits ZOOM STATe 841 CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits STATe 840 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe 838 CALCulate n MARKer m Y PERCent 691 CALCulate n MARKer m Y 850 CALCulate n MARKer m STATe 836 CALCulate n MARKer ms LINK TO MARKer md 835 CALCulate n MATH ...

Page 1043: ...ATistics PRESet 694 CALCulate n STATistics RESult res 698 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe AUTO ONCE 695 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RANGe 695 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe X RLEVel 696 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer 696 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT 696 CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer 697 CALCulate n THReshold 842 CALCulate n THReshold STATe 842 CALCulate n TLINe dl 893 CALCulate n...

Page 1044: ...or SHAPe 818 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor UPPer 819 DISPlay WINDow n SGRam COLor STYLe 819 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor DEFault 818 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor LOWer 818 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor SHAPe 818 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor UPPer 819 DISPlay WINDow n SPECtrogram COLor STYLe 819 DISPlay WINDow n STATe 1020 DISPlay WINDow n TIME 961 DISPlay WINDow n TIME FORMat...

Page 1045: ...HCOPy DEVice LANGuage 1 2 929 HCOPy ITEM ALL 1020 HCOPy ITEM WINDow 1 2 TEXT 930 HCOPy MODE 938 HCOPy PAGE COUNt STATe 930 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 BOTTom 930 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 LEFT 931 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 RIGHt 931 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 TOP 931 HCOPy PAGE MARGin 1 2 UNIT 932 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation 1 2 932 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 CHANnel STATe 932 HCOPy PAGE WINDow 1 2 COUNt 933 HCOPy PAGE WINDow...

Page 1046: ...Tiate n ESPectrum 649 INITiate n SPURious 677 INITiate n IMMediate 616 INPut ip ATTenuation 767 INPut ip ATTenuation AUTO 768 INPut ip ATTenuation PROTection RESet 779 INPut ip EATT AUTO 768 INPut ip FILTer SAW 779 INPut ip FILTer YIG STATe 779 INPut ip GAIN STATe 768 INPut ip IMPedance 780 INPut ip LISN FILTer HPASs STATe 722 INPut ip LISN PHASe 722 INPut ip LISN TYPE 723 INPut ip SELect 780 INPu...

Page 1047: ...y NETWork USEDdrives 916 MMEMory RAW 947 MMEMory RDIRectory 917 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM ALL 917 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM DEFault 918 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM HWSettings 918 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM LINes ALL 919 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM NONE 919 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SCData 919 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SGRam 919 MMEMory SELect CHANnel ITEM SPECtrogram 919 MMEMory SELect CH...

Page 1048: ...54 STATus OPERation CONDition 1008 STATus OPERation ENABle 1009 STATus OPERation NTRansition 1010 STATus OPERation PTRansition 1010 STATus OPERation EVENt 1009 STATus PRESet 1008 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit CONDition 1008 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit ENABle 1009 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit NTRansition 1010 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit PTRansition 1010 STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit EVENt 1009 STAT...

Page 1049: ... 1010 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature CONDition 1008 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature ENABle 1009 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature NTRansition 1010 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature PTRansition 1011 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature EVENt 1009 STATus QUEStionable TIME CONDition 1008 STATus QUEStionable TIME ENABle 1009 STATus QUEStionable TIME NTRansition 1010 STATus QUEStionable TIME PTRansition 1011 S...

Page 1050: ...band 975 SYSTem REBoot 605 SYSTem REVision FACTory 968 SYSTem REVision STRing 976 SYSTem RSWeep 976 SYSTem SEQuencer 611 SYSTem SHUTdown 605 SYSTem SPEaker MUTE 801 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume 801 SYSTem SPEaker STATe 801 SYSTem TIME 962 TRACe n COPY 811 TRACe n DATA 823 TRACe n DATA MEMory 824 TRACe n DATA X 825 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe 772 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME 772 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDo...

Page 1051: ...24 Scaling 318 Settings 313 Analog Demodulation Application 80 Analysis bandwidth 217 Statistics 217 224 226 Analysis BW Softkey APD CCDF 217 Annotations Hiding restoring 512 AP trace information 65 APD 212 About 212 Activating remote control 690 Application 213 Configuring 217 Gate remote control 692 Gate ranges 218 Gated trigger 215 218 Measurement remote control 690 Measurement example 224 Perf...

Page 1052: ...emote control 952 Removing component effects tracking generator 300 Restoring settings external generator 297 Restoring settings internal generator 290 Results remote control 952 RF 528 Settings 527 Signal 527 Signal as RF input 42 Storing results external generator 288 Transmission measurement external generator 296 299 Calibration certificate 14 Calibration Frequency MW 953 Capture time see also...

Page 1053: ... Softkey 415 Spectrograms 410 415 416 420 Step by step 420 Value range 411 Color scheme Spectrogram 410 418 Colors Display 514 Editing 514 Editing remote 963 Print 515 Printing 514 Command sequence Remote 605 Commands Tracking 570 Comment Gate ranges statistics 219 Limit lines 435 Screenshots 480 Softkey 480 Transducer lines 537 Compatibility FSQ FSP FSU FSV 572 GPIB 571 Limit lines 427 433 Mode 5...

Page 1054: ... CCDF 214 Cumulated Measurement Time CMT Harmonics 234 Customer support 1028 CWSource channel setting 64 291 CXA EXA emulation 1004 D Data format ASCII 825 Binary 825 Remote 826 936 Data sheets 13 Date Format 510 Hiding restoring 512 Instrument setting 510 Date and Time Printing 481 Debugging Remote control programs 1024 Decimal separator Trace export 453 455 477 Default Restoring settings 463 Def...

Page 1055: ... register 555 ESR event status register 555 Evaluation Lists SEM 185 Lists Spurious 207 Modes 88 Modes adding 91 Trying out 44 Evaluation bar Using 91 Evaluation list Details Spurious Emissions 209 Peaks Spurious Emissions 209 Spurious Emissions 201 Evaluation methods Remote 739 Event status enable register ESE 555 Remote 601 Event status register ESR 553 555 Remote 601 Example Remote control of a...

Page 1056: ...t 302 Offset 307 Power sensor 281 Range 303 Range defining 309 Reference remote control 951 Span 305 Start 306 Step size 303 Stop 306 Frequency axis Scaling 268 306 Frequency span CP ACLR 131 Frequency sweep Measurement 97 Programming example 736 Front panel Hiding restoring 512 Frontend Temperature 543 Temperature remote 954 Temperature status bit 563 FRQ Internal generator 291 Frq channel bar 64...

Page 1057: ...ut 46 I Q data Exporting 477 I Q Power Trigger level remote 774 ID String User 565 Identification Remote 602 String R S FPL1000 569 String resetting R S FPL1000 569 IF frequency Output 302 Output remote 799 IF Gain GPIB 572 GPIB remote control 975 IF Out Frequency 302 IF output 302 Remote 799 IF OVLD Error 1022 Internal generator 289 291 IF Power Trigger 340 Trigger level remote 773 IF VIDEO DEMOD...

Page 1058: ...434 439 Deleting values 437 Details 434 Editing 434 439 Inserting values 437 Managing 431 Margin 436 Margins 428 Name 435 OBW 157 360 364 Offsets 429 Peak search 157 360 364 Recalling 465 Remote control 894 Saving 437 465 468 Selecting 433 SEM 166 438 Shifting 429 437 441 Spurious 438 Spurious Emissions 202 Storing 431 Threshold 428 435 Time Domain Power measurement 227 Traces 433 View filter 433 ...

Page 1059: ...l 839 843 Next peak 365 Next peak remote control 839 843 Noise measurement 368 Noise measurement remote control 866 Peak 365 Peak remote control 839 843 Peak list remote control 862 Phase noise measurement 371 Phase noise measurement remote control 867 Position 263 353 Positioning 364 Positioning remote control 831 Programming example 882 Remote control 831 Search remote control 839 Setting center...

Page 1060: ...e 376 Marker 376 Remote control 874 n dB down markers Programming example 888 Name CP ACLR channels 141 Limit lines 435 Transducer lines 537 Navigation Controls 35 in tables 35 Navigation keys 36 NCor enhancement label 65 Negative peak detector EMI 255 Negative Peak detector 390 Network Auto login 586 Changing user passwords 585 Configuration dialog box 568 Configuring 548 578 Connecting the instr...

Page 1061: ...rce 302 Parameters 276 Video 302 799 OVEN Error 1022 OVENCOLD Error 1022 OVENCOLD status display 1022 Overload Internal generator 289 RF input remote 779 Overloading Internal generator 292 Overview configuration 94 OVLD Internal generator 289 P Pa channel bar 64 Parallel poll register enable Remote 603 Parameters Entering 73 Input signal 276 Output 276 Passing between applications 82 Passwords Cha...

Page 1062: ...S Power Viewer 279 Reference level 282 Reference level offset 282 Results 279 Selecting 281 Setting up 283 Settings 279 Unit Scale 281 Using 283 Using see user manual 41 Zeroing 281 284 Power supply Connector 38 Power Unit Softkey 137 PPE register 553 555 Preamplifier SEM range 177 Setting 316 Softkey 316 Spurious Emissions range 206 Predefined standards CP ACLR 135 148 Preset channel setup settin...

Page 1063: ... Phase noise measurement 374 Power SEM 181 Range SEM 164 180 Reference channel CP ACLR 136 Reference level 310 313 Adjusting to transducer factors 535 Auto level 315 347 CP ACLR 133 Internal generator 290 Offset 314 Offset Power sensor 282 Position 317 Power sensor 282 SEM range 176 Setting to marker 366 Spurious Emissions range 206 Statistics 221 Unit 313 314 Value 313 Reference line Internal gen...

Page 1064: ...put Overload protection remote 779 Remote 778 RF Input Connector 36 RF OVLD Error 1022 Internal generator 291 RF OVLD status display 1022 RM trace information 65 RMS VBW 392 RMS average Detector 254 RMS Average detector EMI 257 RMS detector 390 EMI 255 VBW 321 Rotary knob 36 RRC filter SEM 181 RUN CONT Key 98 331 415 RUN SINGLE Key 98 331 416 S S N ratio Measurement example 102 116 SA trace inform...

Page 1065: ...81 Reference range 180 Reference range remote control 665 Restoring standard files 185 Result files 190 Results 160 Results Multi SEM 162 Results remote control 673 688 Results remote 163 RF attenuation 176 RF attenuation mode 176 RRC filter 181 Saving result summary 187 Settings files 183 189 Standard files 183 Standards remote control 647 Sweep List 174 Sweep list remote control 651 Sweep Points...

Page 1066: ... APD CCDF 218 Power Bandwidth 156 ACLR Mode 137 Adjust Settings 138 152 157 236 Adjust Settings APD 218 222 Adjust X Axis 207 All Functions Off 386 Amplitude Config 313 Analysis BW APD CCDF 217 Auto All 347 Auto Freq 347 Auto Level 315 347 Bandwidth Config 324 C N 151 C No 151 Carrier Noise Config 150 Center 305 Center Mkr Freq 365 Channel Bandwidth 152 157 Channel defined Sequencer 86 Clear Spect...

Page 1067: ...Color curve 411 417 421 Color mapping 410 415 416 420 Color mapping remote control 818 Color scheme 410 418 Configuring 419 Configuring remote control 812 Continue frame 407 Display 404 Display depth 3 D 415 Displaying 418 Evaluation method 119 Frame count 407 Frames remote control 812 History depth 415 Markers 408 419 Markers remote control 851 Programming example 828 Removing 419 Scaling 407 Sel...

Page 1068: ...ionable LMARgin 561 STATus QUEStionable POWer 562 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature 563 STATUs QUEStionable TEMPerature 543 954 STATus QUEStionable TIMe 563 Status reporting system 552 Common commands 600 Step size Markers 357 Markers remote control 837 Stop frequency Softkey 306 Storage 1030 Storage location Data files 468 Settings 184 469 472 Storage settings File type 470 Storing Settings 464 465...

Page 1069: ...s register 563 Template 493 Test report 492 Theme Display 514 515 Display remote 963 Third order intercept point see TOI 237 Threshold Limit lines 428 435 Peak search 360 364 Signal tracking 308 Time Format 510 Hiding restoring 512 Instrument setting 510 Time Domain Power 226 About 226 Configuring 228 Limit lines 227 229 Measurement remote control 700 Measurement example 230 Measuring 229 Restrict...

Page 1070: ...ge 177 Settings 533 Shifting 538 542 Softkey 533 Spurious Emissions range 206 Storing 533 Unit 537 Validity 532 View filter 535 X axis 537 Y axis unit 532 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator 296 299 How to tracking generator 300 TRG channel bar 64 Trigger Configuration preview 338 Drop out time 341 Drop Out Time 336 Event remote 604 External remote 774 External errors 1023 Hold...

Page 1071: ...ng 92 Closing 92 Closing remote 745 Dialog boxes 73 Layout remote 742 Maximizing remote 816 Querying remote 740 741 Replacing remote 742 Size 93 Splitting remote 816 Types remote 739 WRONG_FW Error 522 542 1022 X X axis Adjusting Spurious Emissions 207 Limit lines 436 Scaling 268 306 Transducer lines 537 X Offset Limit lines 433 X value Marker 263 353 Y Y axis Limit lines 436 Max Min statistics 22...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands